Home

Voyager with Unicode Cataloging User's Guide

1. Description aaa i Keyboard Equivalent Degree i Shift F1 Phonocopyright Shift F3 Copyright Shift F4 Sharp Shift F5 Inverted Shift F6 Inverted i Shift F7 Special Characters cfg The Special Characters cfg file located in the Catalog folder in the Cataloging module installation directory may be customized to contain character mappings that can be used with the Special Character Mode in the Cataloging module By default the file is installed with the mappings identified in Table 6 1 This file is encoded in Latin 1 Any characters outside the Latin 1 character set may be referenced in the Special Characters cfg file using XML entity references An XML entity reference is in the format amp x1234 where 1234 is the hexidecimal representation of the Unicode UTF 8 character A IMPORTANT Literal commas in any field in this file must be encoded using the XML entity reference form The XML entity reference for the comma is amp x2C Entity references may appear in either hexadecimal or decimal notation File Contents The Special Characters cfg file is a list of comma separated values Each entry contains three comma separated fields This file may contain tabs for readabiltiy First Field The first field contains the value of the keyboard key that accesses the entry If this field is empty the entry is only available using the Special Characters Entry form Endeavor Information Sy
2. Action Codes Description a ends alternate font B starts bold b ends bold I starts italic i ends italic U starts underline u ends underline S starts new font size a two digit size must follow S s ends new font size T inserts a tab F inserts field data a three digit field code must follow F Initiating and Ending Action Codes The A and a B and b I and i U and u and s and s action codes are initiated and ended in the same way Enter the uppercase action code before the information it is to effect and enter the lowercase action code after the information it is to effect For example if you want the caption Item Barcode to print in bold enter BItem Barcode b Printing Field Information To print field information you must enter a field code after the F action code For example if you entered Item Barcode as a caption and wanted the item barcode information to be retrieved from the server and printed after the Item Barcode caption you enter Item Barcode F 401 Printing in the Alternate Font To have the item barcode information print in the alternate font and font size you would enter the A action code when the alternate font is to start and the a action code when the alternate font is to end Item Barcode A F401l a Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printin
3. Figure A 17 Result in Cataloging module of the sample template configuration stanza Drop Down Menu Selections Stanzas xxx In these stanzas you input all the selections you want available from the drop down menus for the fixed field grids in the Cataloging module A sample stanza indicating drop down menu selections for books is highlighted in Figure A 18 006 008BooksBiography _ No biographical material a Autobiography b Individual biography c Collective biography d Contains biographical information No attempt to code Figure A 18 Sample stanza defining drop down menu options for the 006 and 008 fields Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page A 22 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode MARC Tag Tables NOTE You can input drop down menus for more than one field In Table A 18 the values for the drop down menu pertain to both the 006 and the 008 fields The stanza in Figure A 18 generates the drop down menu shown in Figure A 19 to display in the Cataloging module No biographical material E No biographical material b Individual biography c Collective biography d Contains biographical information No attempt to code Figure A 19 Result in the Cataloging module of the sample drop down menu stanza Shortcut for Entering Numerical Data When working with numerical data and the program sees a tilde to the left of the equal sign it creat
4. Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 6 2 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Diacritics and Non Roman Characters Special Character Mode The procedure for entering a diacritic or non Roman character using Special Character Mode is shown in Procedure 6 2 Special Character Mode on page 6 3 Procedure 6 2 Special Character Mode Use the following to enter a diacritic or non Roman character with Special Character Mode 1 Select Special Character Mode from the Edit menu Result Special Character displays in the status bar of the Cataloging module 2 Type the character that maps to the character you want to enter into the MARC record See Table 6 1 Result This enters the diacritic or non Roman character into the MARC record 3 Select Special Character Mode from the Edit menu Result This turns off Special Character Mode and returns you to your normal mode of entry Special Character Mode Mapping The keyboard equivalents for entering diacritic and non Roman characters in Special Character Mode is shown in Table 6 1 NOTE The file of Special Character Mode characters can be customized to match your institution s preferences and may not exactly match the list shown in Table 6 1 See Special Characters cfg on page 6 7 for more information Table 6 1 Special Character Mode Mapping Diacritic amp Non Roman Characters Diacritic Non Roman Description Character K
5. Figure 7 13 Item barcode not found One of the following general statuses is provided in the Processing Report e Processed e Unable to update item record because duplicate barcodes exist e Unable to update item record because barcode not found e Unable to read file format Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 7 10 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Pick and Scan NOTE After the operator closes the Pick and Scan session the Processing Report information is cleared and no longer available ea TIP Use the Processing Report to locate errors in the Windows barcode file used in Pick and Scan batch processing The scrolling window keeps track of everything processed up to the point of any error By comparing the Processing Report with the Windows file of barcodes the operator can determine where to resume batch processing 7 Click Close when Pick and Scan processing is complete Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 7 11 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 7 12 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Templates Contents Introduction 8 1 Creating Editing and Deleting Templates 8 2 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 8 i Contents Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 8 ii Febr
6. Retrieve by record id Retrieve by barcode Unlink holding from bibliographic Relink holding to bibliographic Show Associated Records Retrieve Holdings Greate Holdings Retrieve Items Create Items Retrieve Authorities View Line Items in Acquisitions Get call number from bib record Ctrl N Verify 856 links Ctrl K Validate heading Gtri H Save to Database Ctrl B Save to Database and Close Ctrl Z Delete Send Record To Import Location Call Number an i Figure 2 36 Get call number from bib record menu option NOTE If the associated bib record does not include the call number fields defined in the call number hierarchy you selected such as the fields are deleted get call number from bib record does not work You still see the function on the Record menu of the Cataloging toolbar it is not grayed out but selecting the function does not cause an effect in the MFHD 852 field For example if you have selected an LC call number hierarchy based on the 050 field but the associated bibliographic record does not contain the 050 field you are not able use the function On the other hand if the associated bib record includes call number fields that are empty of data you receive two warning messages when using get call number from bib record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 49 2 50
7. leader 9 is a This is an error There is not attempt made to reconvert a record that is already defined as a Unicode record 066 Error This is an error This indicates that the character sets in the 066 are not supported by the converter Table C 2 Log Information Provided for Field Level Warnings amp Errors Warnings amp Errors Information Provided The record type and ID of the record The index within the record of the field that generated the error This is the index within all the field of the record not within fields with the same tag The tag of the field that generated the error The text c gt 8 indicates that the conversion was from Voyager encoding to Unicode The error type is specified as follows e Page indicates to which code page MARC character subset the source character belongs This is a number that corresponds to specific code pages See Table C 3 for a list of the code pages e At indicates the position within the field of the source character that caused the problem e A hexidecimal dump of the source character and the following seven characters is provided e An ASCII dump of the source character and the following seven characters If the source character or any following characters are control characters or diacritics their code point value is not between 32 and 127 they display as periods Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on
8. The first message informs you that the call number field is invalid and that you need to check for the presence of subfield diameters and codes Then if you click OK you receive a second message The second message informs you that the system is unable to assemble the holdings record or unable to assemble the bib record if the associated bib record is open For example if the MFHD s associated bib record contains an 050 field that is empty of data but the field itself is not deleted you receive the two warning messages Save your MFHD in standard Voyager Cataloging fashion NOTE In cases where you are replacing an existing call number with one from the same classification scheme or not you receive a warning message before the call number is replaced See Figure 2 37 If you click Yes the existing call number will be replaced if you click No the call number will not be replaced Voyager Cataloging A ee Figure 2 37 Message for replacing an existing call number with a new one If you are replacing the call number with one from a different classification scheme such as LC to Dewey you receive a second warning message See Figure 2 38 This warning message ensures that you are aware that the existing call number is from a different classification scheme than the new one If you click Yes the call number is replaced This also automatically changes the 852 field s first indicator to the appropriate value
9. DatabaseName d Local Database Bibliographic Voyager Edi Local Database Northwestern Bibliographic Voyager OCLC Bibliographic 23950 RLG PsycINFO 1996 Citation 23950 June 1999 RLG SilverPlatter Wilson Art Abstracts Citation 239 50 on Kumba Bibliographic Figure 3 16 Selecting databases to search 4 Click the Connect button or press Alt C to connect to the database s you have selected If you are connecting to one database the Remote Search dialog box opens with the name of the database to which you are connected displayed after the colon Figure 3 17 If you are connecting to more than one database the Simultaneous Search dialog box opens Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 19 3 20 Remote Search RLG Figure 3 17 Remote Search dialog box Enter the criteria by which you want to search For detailed information on searching for records in the Cataloging module see the Search Dialog Box on page 3 28 NOTE Searching for records in other databases especially if they are non Voyager databases may be different from searching for records your local database For instance if you are performing a simultaneous search of your local database and a non Voyager database only the attributes that the databases have in common as defined in System Administration s Database Definitions display
10. Carpenter G F Local Database Legal impediments to ridesharing Keamey Edward F Local Database TNT arrangements an update by Edward F Keamey Increasing commuting by transit and United States General Accounting Office Local Database tidesharing many factors should be AMMINI considered summary report to the Figure 3 19 Titles Index dialog box For detailed information on the Titles Index dialog box see Keyword Search Results The Titles Index on page 3 32 7 Highlight the record you want to import on the Titles Index dialog box or use the Ctrl or Shift keys to select more than one and click OK or double click the record The bibliographic record displays Figure 3 20 Click Cancel to exit the Titles Index Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 22 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records v Imported remote Bib UTBG91 B15858 Figure 3 20 Record imported from another database For details on bibliographic records see the Bibliographic Recordssection on 2 3 8 Once the record is imported into your database you can manipulate it as necessary and save it to your database or to a work file For detailed information on saving records see Saving and Printing Information on page 4 5 NOTE The title bar of the bibliographic record indicates that it has been imported See Figure 3 20 However once the rec
11. FL J Retain search limits between searches Figure 3 54 Selected search limits listed in the bottom portion of the dialog box OPTIONAL Click the Retain search limits between searches check box OPTIONAL To edit the limits you have chosen select a limit type value from the Value column and click the Delete button to remove the value from the limits to be applied or click the Clear button to remove all limit type values from the Value column Click OK to accept the limiting criteria and return to the Search dialog box Result The search limits are set Remote Databases 3 58 If remote databases are defined in the Database Definitions work space of the System Administration module users can search these databases in the Acquisitions and Cataloging modules See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details on defining databases You can include your local database in the remote database search which creates a simultaneous search of local and remote databases Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records If you have opened the Search dialog box and you have set up remote searches in the System Administration module a Remote button displays on the Search dialog box see Figure 3 55 Keyword Non Keyword Builder History Search by Find Jorac Subject Headings Search x
12. If the active source record contains 022 nn fa 1234 5678 And the cataloging template contains 773 nn x lt x 022a gt should be either 773 nn x lt 022a gt or 773 nn lt fx 022a gt Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 15 Table 5 12 Example 9 Derivation field contains Then the new record 773 nn x lt x 022a gt copies the characters exactly NOTE If a template containing derivation fields is used to create a new record without an active source record the system considers the derivation fields as non matching and output information to the new record as described in Table 5 7 and Table 5 8 Template Example There is no limit to the number of templates you can create They can be short templates containing only a few tags and subfields or very long They can contain derivation fields or not And you can include derivation fields into standard templates With the addition of derivation fields template functionality has been expanded to now include Tags and subfields with static text You could use static text when you create multiple records using the same subject headings Example 650 nn a Geography tb United States Tags with subfields used as place markers Use the place markers as reminders to always complete those particular subfields Example 300 ta tb tc Tags with subfields
13. ala Lakin nk Clear All Figure 3 41 See Also Search results from the narrower term From the Reference Information dialog box the operator can do a new search for the see also term by selecting it and clicking the Do Search button see Figure 3 42 Reference Information See Also Military art and science Narrower Term Military policy Narrower Term Naval art and science Narrower Term Nuclear warfare Narrower Term Revolutions Narrower Term Sociology Military Narrower Term War and society caresi Figure 3 42 See Also The system then does a new search for the see also term Figure 3 43 displays the search results of the See Also term Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Headings List Bibs OPAC Subject Headings Search Heading Heading Type 29 Peace 1 Peace 1 Peace Abstracting and indexing LC subject headings LC subject headings for children LC subject headings Reference 0 Peace Conference at Paris 1919 1920 LC subject headings 2 Peace Corps U S LC subject headings Reference 0 Peace Democrats Copperhead movement LC subject headings 1 Peace Fiction LC subject headings for children 1 Peace in art LC subject headings Reference 0 Peace Inner LC subiect headinas hha Cancel Search Authority Clear All Search OPAC Subject
14. tz Public Note The following is an example of 856 fields in a MARC record specifying public notes 856 4 tu http www akc org z The American Kennel Club Web page 856 4 tu http www whitehouse gov z the White House Web page This example causes the following to display in WebVoyage The American Kennel Club Web page The White House Web pag NOTE This example displays as active links to the URLs specified in tu 3 Materials Specified The following is an example of an 856 field in a MARC record specifying a Table of Contents 856 7 3 Table of Contents 2 HTTP tu http lcweb loc gov cardir toc This example causes the following to display in WebVoyage Table of Contents NOTE This example displays as an active link to the bibliographic item s Table of Contents If the 856 contains only a fu then the URL displays as a link in the OPAC Images on a Server If you want to link to files stored on a server you can use 4d tf and to fo may contain the literals UNIX or DOS identifying the type of server to which the link points Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 21 2 22 The following is an example of a MARC record 856 field specifying a link to an image on a server 856 td c word winword tf schedule doc to dos z 1995 Fall Class Schedule NOTE When a record displays with a link to an image on a server a t
15. Changing Saving and Printing Information Line Al Templates 2 Blank 3 Bibliographic 4 Holdings 5 Item 6 Serial Issue 7 8 Print Options Blank 9 StandardFont Times New Roman 10 StandardFontSize 12 11 AlternateFont Arial 12 AlternateFontSize 12 13 Copies 3 14 TabWidth 1 15 Margin 0 05 16 SpineLabelHeight 1 625 17 SpineLabelWidth 9 18 PieceLabelHeight 1 625 19 PieceLabelWidth 2 9 20 21 Print Template Spine Blank 22 Name B F102 b 23 Addr1l U F510 u 24 Addr2 F511 29 Addr3 F512 26 Addr4 F513 27 Addr5 F514 28 City F515 29 St F516 30 Zip F517 eal Country F518 32 Figure 4 9 Sample label print template file Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 25 Line 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 5I 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 Print Template Piece Blank Name B F102 b Addr1 U F510 u Addr2 F511 Addr3 F512 Addr4 F513 Addr5 F514 City F515 St F516 Zip F517 Country F518 Print Options Bibliographic StandardFont Times New Roman StandardFontSize 12 AlternateFont Arial AlternateFontSize 12 Copies 1 TabWidth 1 Margin 0 05 SpineLabelHeight 1 625 SpineLabelWidth 9 PieceLabelHeight 1 625 PieceLabelWidth 2 9 Print Template Spine Bibliographic Name B F102 b Addr
16. If you are creating many new related records but need to use more than one of your templates do not define a default template in the Templates block Instead define the folder in the Template field on the Folders Files tab of Session Defaults and Preferences This causes the Open File dialog box to open when you click the New button At that point you can choose the appropriate template for the current source record The procedure for creating a new records using a default folder is shown in Procedure 5 7 Creating New Records Using a Default Folder on page 5 26 Procedure 5 7 Creating New Records Using a Default Folder 5 26 Use the following to create new records using a default folder Search for and display the source bibliographic record Click the New button Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking Result The Select Bibliographic Template dialog box opens 3 Select the appropriate template file and click Open or double click the template file The system automatically uses the template you selected to create the new record 4 Edit the new record as necessary If you are using a template containing derivation fields make sure the information a mapped correctly If a derivation field displays in the new record it may be because the source record did not contain the tag specified 5 Save the new re
17. New Creates a new record Search Searches for a record in the database Make a Copy Copies the active record It must have been retrieved from the database Change Owning Library Changes the owning library of the current biblio graphic record Retrieve by ID Retrieves the record by an ID number Retrieve by Barcode Retrieves a record by its barcode number Unlink Holdings from Bib Unlinks a holdings record from multiple biblio graphic records Relink Holdings to Bib Re links the current item record to a different holdings record Show Associated Records Displays holding bibliographic and item records associated with the active record Retrieve Holdings Retrieves the holdings records for the active record Create Holdings Creates a new holdings record for the active record Retrieve Item Retrieves the item records for the active holdings record Create Items Creates a new item record for the active holdings record Retrieve Authorities Retrieves the authority records for the active record View Line Items in Acquisi tions Ctrl M Allows you to automatically pull up and edit a line item in the Acquisitions module from an open bibliographic or holdings record in the Cataloging module Both the Cataloging and Acquisitions modules must be open and logged into with the same user ID and password Endeavor Information Systems Inc See
18. Search by Find Names hd C Browse Heading Types Filter Locations Filter 7 Not applicable licable Search for steir Limits are in Effect Cancel Clear Limit Figure 3 45 Completed Non keyword tab 8 Click the Do Search button to perform the search Result If you performed a non heading search the Titles Index list box displays matching titles Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 48 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records If you performed a heading search the Headings List displays all matching headings Click the heading that most closely matches what your are searching for then click the OK button or double click the heading The Titles Index list box then displays the matching titles See Keyword Search Results The Titles Index on page 3 32 9 Click the item you want to highlight it in the Titles Index dialog box and click OK Optionally double click the title to select it To select all titles click the Select All button Result The MARC tab of the selected record s displays Builder Tab and Builder Searching The Builder tab of the Search dialog box allows you to build complex searches using multiple fields search terms and Boolean operators Figure 3 46 displays the Builder tab of the Search dialog box Search 4 Keyword Non Keyword Builder History Search for fany of these Search
19. See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode About This Document You must first dial the US access code for example 00 for the United Kingdom and New Zealand 0011 for Australia then the number listed above You do not need to put a 1 in front of the 800 number E mail To contact Customer Support by e mail please send your message to support endinfosys com Fax To send a fax with cover to Customer Support dial from within the United States of America 847 227 2676 Customer Support Hours of Operation Monday Friday 5am 9pm Central Daylight Time Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xxxiii Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page xxxiv February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Getting Started Contents Introduction 1 1 Purpose of this Chapter 1 1 Prerequisite Skills and Knowledge 1 1 Before You Begin 1 2 e Documentation and Online Help 1 2 e Conventions 1 2 Commands 1 2 Ellipsis Button 1 2 e Keyboard Functions 1 3 e Logging into Cataloging 1 4 e Exiting Cataloging 1 5 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 1 i Contents Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 1 ii February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Getting Started Introduction This chapter describes the prerequi
20. Superscript Superscript Superscript Subscript 0 Subscript 1 Subscript 2 Subscript 3 Subscript 4 Subscript 5 Subscript 6 Subscript 7 Subscript 8 Subscript 9 Subscript NI lt X S lt C 4A 0 D O V Z C KJ S Subscript 1 Subscript Aa _ Subscript Ne a Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 6 5 Table 6 1 Special Character Mode Mapping Diacritic amp Non Roman Characters Description ae eee Keyboard Equivalent Pseudo Question Mark Grave a Acute b Circumflex c Tilde x d Macron 2 e Breve s Dot Above g Umlaut h Hacek i Angstrom 5 j Ligature left k Ligature right High Comma off center f m Double Acute 7 n Candrabindu o Cedilla F p Hook Right q Dot Below i r Double Dot Below s Circle Below t Double Underscore u Underscore _ v Hook Left F w Right Cedilla F x Upadhmaniya 5 y Double Tilde first half S z Double Tilde second half a High Comma Centered Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 6 6 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Diacritics and Non Roman Characters Table 6 1 Special Character Mode Mapping Diacritic amp Non Roman Characters
21. e The column may be blank indicating that the heading does not match e The heading may display in a normalized form and matches the authority heading e The headings do not match partially or they are from another index Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 9 3 Buttons on the Authority Validation Dialog Box The following buttons see Table 9 2 display on the Authority Validation dialog box Table 9 2 Authority Validation Dialog Box Button Description Create auth This button allows you to generate a new Authority record The NUC code in the 040 comes from the Cata loging location s Owning Libraries NUC code The Authority record s location must correspond to the Own ing Libraries Location To activate the Create auth but ton you must first select the error in the Authority Validation dialog by clicking the row label the grey left column When you click the Create auth button the New Authority Record dialog box opens The record that is created here is not based on the tem plate specified in Session Preferences It uses a standard established by the Library of Congress For more detailed information see the web site http leweb loc gov catdir pcec strawn html Retrieve auth This button is disabled if the heading selected has no associated authority record It is used to retrieve an authority record when one
22. g TIP In order to keep track of the updates you make to the tag tables record your additions edits and or deletions at the beginning of each configuration file in the comment area In the Table A 5 example notice that the initials of the tag table editor are included to keep track of who performed the modifications Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 5 comment your work EJW comment starting date 7 22 97 EJW sorted authority bib amp Mfhd sections 7 22 97 EJW added bib 261 and 262 8 11 97 ES deleted bib 211 212 214 350 503 539 590 599 8 11 97 ES added 856 to holdings 1 6 98 EJW added authority fields for subdivision records 2 24 98 EJW changed RecFormat code im description 3 10 98 HB changed RecFormat of im Audio to im Music 5 21 98 ES update 3 8 13 98 KLD added u as a Holding value in RecFormat 5 4 99 ES Figure A 5 Sample comment area of a tag table Stanzas in the MARC Tag Tables MARC tag tables are divided into sections called stanzas Stanzas are generally located after the comment area at the beginning of a configuration file Stanza Names Each stanza begins with a name or a title enclosed in square brackets such as 410 The stanza name is unique within each configuration file Stanzas are the main component of the tag tables They define contents and values o
23. with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records OPTIONAL 7 Click the Limits button to display the Search Limits dialog box and further limit your search See Search Limits on page 3 54 8 To search click the Do Search button To cancel and close the Search dialog box click the Cancel button Result The Titles Index or Headings List displays the results of the search History tab The History tab see Figure 3 49 gives you access to all searches you performed during this session For each search you performed it lists the search parameters and the number of records returned Hits Keyword Non Keyword Builder History Hits Search Text OPAC Subject Headings Search documentary 10 Journal Title lt histor 1 Kepword conductivity 9 Title lt discourse 0 Title lt discourse Edit Cancel Clear Limit Figure 3 49 Search dialog box History tab From the History tab you can re execute searches previously performed or edit previous search statements IMPORTANT The History tab does not retain information about search limits If you re execute or edit a search from the History tab any current limits in effect are used instead of any limits you previously specified Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 53 The procedure for accessing searches from the History tab is shown in Proced
24. 014 O a OA 1 b OA 2 z 1A 3 9 OA Subfa Linkage number Subfb Source of number Subfz Cancelled invalid linkage number Subf9 Old holdings linkage number 014Ind1 0 0 1 1 Value0 Holdings record number Valuel Bibliographic record number 014Ind2 0 Value _ Undefined Figure A 6 Sample stanzas from the Hmarc0xx cfg file for MARC21 format Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 7 MARC tag field indicator field This is the name of the stanza In Figure A 6 this is 014 014Ind1 and 014Ind2 MARC subfield In Figure A 6 there are four subfields defined as a b z and 9 Software order number These numbers are only used by the software itself and are insignificant to the actual user In Figure A 6 there are four software order numbers 0 1 2 and 3 Subfield rule definition The value 0 or 1 indicates if the field is repeatable 0 means it is a non repeatable field and 1 means it is a repeatable field In Figure A 6 subfields a b and 9 are non repeatable fields and subfield z is a repeatable field Subfield rule definition The subfield rule value either A M or O indicates whether the field is applicable mandatory or optional A means the field is applicable M means it is mandatory and means it is optional In Figure A 6 all the subfields are applicable with a value of A None are mandatory or optiona
25. 2 22 URN 2 22 verifying 2 22 10 7 A About this document xxvii audience xxvii comments xxxii conventions used xxix how to use xxviii purpose xxvii accessing searches 3 54 Acq inthe Cat 2 28 3 68 setup 3 69 Acquisitions in Cataloging action codes 4 19 Adding an 856 field 4 3 Authority button 3 42 Authority control 9 1 9 2 Authority records 008 field 2 31 2 32 colors of 10 16 description 2 28 History tab 2 35 leader 2 29 2 30 2 28 February 2004 MARC tab 2 28 retrieving 3 77 System tab 2 34 variable fields 2 33 2 34 Available Locations section Voyager Connection Options dialog box 3 61 B batch file processing Pick and Scan 7 1 7 9 Bib De Duping 4 8 Bib field Session Defaults and Preferences Cataloging module 5 22 Bib heading validation 4 11 Bibliographic Record Linking profile 5 2 bibliographic record search builder search 3 51 Bibliographic records 006 field 2 6 2 9 007 field 2 9 2 11 008 field 2 12 2 14 505 field 2 24 colors of 10 16 creating from Image Server 3 25 description 2 3 2 25 editing 4 2 History tab 2 26 leader 2 4 2 6 linking to other records 3 80 3 81 3 83 MARC tab 2 3 suppress from OPAC 2 26 2 53 System tab 2 24 unlinking from holdings 3 82 variable fields 2 14 2 24 Verify 856 links 2 22 Boolean button 3 50 Boolean operators 3 49 Boolean radio button 3 31 bound with 2 54 3 10 3 80
26. 3 82 10 18 bracket left opening angle element in derivation field 5 9 bracket right opening angle element in derivation field 5 10 Browse radio button 3 37 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page Voyager with Unicode IN 1 browse search 3 39 builder search deleting search terms 3 50 editing search terms 3 50 builder searching 3 49 3 51 Builder tab 3 49 button Boolean 3 50 Connect 3 62 Limit 3 32 3 38 3 50 3 56 Remote 3 29 3 32 3 38 3 50 3 61 Show Results 3 65 Status 3 66 Stop 3 33 3 41 Stop Search 3 64 button Authority 3 42 C call number searching 3 40 Cat in the Acq 2 28 3 68 Catalog folder 5 21 5 24 Cataloging in Acquisitions 3 68 Cataloging module record maintaining 5 1 searching for 5 1 Related Records displaying 5 1 5 5 Related Records menu 5 1 example 5 3 Session Defaults and Preferences 5 18 5 25 defining a default folder 5 23 5 25 defining a default template 5 19 5 23 Folders Files tab 5 18 5 25 template 5 5 5 8 creating 5 5 5 6 defining a default 5 19 5 23 deleting 5 8 editing 5 6 5 7 saving Related Records 5 17 using to create new record 5 25 5 27 using to create Related Records 5 8 5 18 check box Retain search Limits between searches 3 58 Closing Cataloging 1 5 records 4 30 Colors of records 10 16 configuration file Special Characters cfg 6 7 Connect button 3 62 Connection column
27. 400 Series 4 23 4 10 Library Address Field Codes 500 Series 4 24 4 11 Received Serial Issue Field Codes 600 Series 4 24 C 5 Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking 5 1 Example of profile names and overrides 5 2 5 2 Description of the first example in line 1 of Figure 5 7 5 9 5 3 Description of the first example in line 2 of Figure 5 7 5 10 5 4 Examples of spacing in derivation fields 5 10 5 5 Example 1 Derivation field 5 13 5 6 Example 2 Derivation field 5 13 5 7 Example 3 Derivation field 5 13 5 8 Example 4 Derivation field 5 14 5 9 Example 5 Derivation field 5 14 5 10 Example 6 Derivation field 5 15 5 11 Example 7 Derivation field 5 15 5 12 Example 9 Derivation field 5 15 5 13 Example of a template using standard and derivation fields 5 17 ee 6 Diacritics and Non Roman Characters 6 1 Special Character Mode Mapping Diacritic amp Non Roman Characters 6 3 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page xx February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Tables EE 9 Authority Control 9 1 Authority Validation Dialog Box 9 2 9 2 Authority Validation Dialog Box 9 4 9 3 Tree Descriptions 9 5 9 4 Original Heading Information Displayed 9 12 9 5 Proposed New Heading Information Displayed 9 12 9 6 Authority Headings Information Displayed 9 13 9 7 Button Descriptions 9 14 9 8 Button Description for Preview Display 9 15 EE z 10 Session Defaults and Menu Options 10 1
28. Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode IN 9 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page IN 10 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode
29. General tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences 10 2 10 2 Validation tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences 10 5 10 3 Work Flow tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences 10 9 10 4 Item Defaults tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences 10 11 10 5 Folders Files tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences 10 13 10 6 Mapping tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences 10 15 10 7 Record types available for color change 10 17 10 8 File Menu 10 19 10 9 Edit Menu 10 20 10 10 Record Menu 10 22 10 11 Item Menu 10 23 10 12 Display Menu 10 24 10 13 Options Menu 10 24 10 14 Window Menu 10 24 10 15 10 25 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xxi Tables E A MARC Tag Tables A 1 Text Masking Options A 21 De B Voyager Call Number Logic Processing B 1 852 first indicator values B 1 B 2 852 first indicator non standard values B 2 B 3 Subfield 2 Codes B 2 B 4 CACODOCS and UDC classifications B 2 D C Voyager with Unicode Considerations C 1 Record Level Warnings amp Errors C 6 C 2 Log Information Provided for Field Level Warnings amp Errors C 6 C 3 Code Page Numbering C 7 C 4 Specific Warnings amp Errors C 7 C 5 Bulkilmport Rules Results C 8 xxii Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Procedure
30. Inc See notice on first page 4 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information 2 Select Record gt Change Owning Library from the Cataloging toolbar 3 Select the appropriate owning library and click OK Click Cancel to close the Select an Owning Library dialog box without changing the owning library If a Cataloging Location is selected that has no associated owning library the user will be unable to add edit or delete any bibliographic record Saving and Printing Information This section describes the process for saving and printing information Saving a Record Save To save a record you can select from the following toolbar options e File gt Save e File gt Save As e Record gt Save to Database e Record gt Save to Database and Close e Record gt Save to Database and to Local File e Record gt Save to Database and to Local File and Close Because Cataloging works with records in two locations the database and work folders it is important to understand where records are saved You can always determine in which work folder a record is saved by using File gt Save As NOTE Records saved to the databased are validated based on the options chosen on the Validation tab of Session Defaults and Preferences See Validation Tab Figure 10 2 on page 10 4 for more information You can save an active record or a template to a file in a work folder by selecting File gt Save or
31. The connections you select in the Voyager Connection Options dialog box remain throughout the session unless you change them To do so click the Remote button from the Search dialog box and de select select new databases Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 66 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Additional Options for Displaying a Record Web Server http POST You can display an active bibliographic or holdings record from Cataloging in WebVoyage for example using an http POST request to send a MARC record to a web server This is an optional feature that is set in the voyager ini file with the MARC POSTing stanza For more information regarding setup see the Voyager Technical User s Guide See Procedure 3 13 Display Record in WebVoyage Example on page 3 67 for an example of displaying an active bibliographic or holdings records from the Cataloging module in WebVoyage Procedure 3 13 Display Record in WebVoyage Example Use the following to display an active bibiliographic or holdings record in WebVoyage Search and open a bibliographic record in the Cataloging module Result This makes the bibliographic record active Optional Click Get Holdings Result This makes the holdings record active Click Record gt Send Record To gt WebVoyage See Figure 3 62 Result This displays the active record in WebVoyage NOTE The a
32. Voyager Connection Options dialog box 3 61 contacting Endeavor Information Systems Inc xxx Copy button 4 11 Copying a record 4 13 Creating bibliographic record from Image Server 3 25 records 3 1 3 5 3 8 templates 8 2 D Database Name column Voyager Connection Options dialog box 3 61 default folder using to create new record 5 26 default template using to create new record 5 25 Defaults templates 10 13 Deleting records 4 2 4 3 templates 8 3 deleting search terms in builder search 3 50 delimiter symbol element in derivation field 5 9 derivation field 5 9 5 17 element bracket left opening angle 5 9 bracket right opening angle 5 10 delimiter symbol 5 9 subfield 5 9 tag 5 9 example 5 12 5 16 format 5 9 multiple subfields 5 12 non matching subfield 5 12 reading 5 11 rule 5 12 5 16 diacritic characters Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Index entering 6 2 diacritic mode 6 3 diacritics 6 1 6 3 dialog box Reference Information 3 43 Remote Search 3 62 Search 3 28 3 30 3 49 Search Limits 3 54 3 56 Search Status 3 64 Select Bibliographic Template 5 21 5 22 5 27 Select Directory 5 24 Session Defaults and Preferences 5 18 5 19 5 23 Simultaneous Search 3 63 Voyager Connection Options 3 59 3 61 Display Bibliographic Record Directly If Search Results In Only One Title 3 30 Displa
33. a TT879 B3 tb T44 1975 ta 746 14 ta Tebki Gb ria Roth 4 4 a The baskets of rural America c Gloria Roth Teleki ta istad Fa New York tb Luton fo 1975 Library Of Conaress Control Number Figure 2 2 Bibliographic Record MARC Tab Bibliographic Leader The Bibliographic Leader information allows you to select the Bibliographic Record Status Type of Record Bibliographic Level Type of Control Encoding Level and Cataloging Form The Bibliographic Leader displays as a grid which is completely configurable using Voyager s MARC tag tables See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for details on the MARC tag tables The procedure for viewing the Bibliographic Leader is shown in Procedure 2 1 Viewing the Bibliographic Leader on page 2 4 Procedure 2 1 Viewing the Bibliographic Leader Use the following to select the Bibliographic Leader information from a bibliographic record 1 Click the Leader button Figure 2 3 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Figure 2 3 Bibliographic Leader Button Result The Leader dialog box opens as a grid Figure 2 4 a Language material m Monograph item _ No specific type of control _ Full level _ Non lSBD Figure 2 4 Leader dialog box 2 Select values from the grid by clicking a particular cell and the down arrow to disp
34. headings must be resolved or overridden by clicking the Continue button on the Authority Validation dialog box Figure 9 1 before the record is saved to the Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 9 1 database However the database requires that in all variable length fields each subfield indicator is followed by text even if this option is selected A single space following the indicator is a sufficient amount of text Authority Yalidation SBE ta Clemens Samuel Langhorne fd 1835 1910 fa Clemens Samuel Langhorne td 1835 1910 Heading Validated 800 Cosmetic Differances ta Twain Mark td 18235 1910 ta Twain Mark td 1835 1910 a ta Clemens Samuel NamaTitle 10X245 Langhorne td 1835 1910 ta Sketches new and old Partial Heading ta Twain Mark td 1835 1910 Named an Validation ft Works ja Twain Mark td 1836 1910 5 Create auth Retrieve auth Copy Search Continue Figure 9 1 Authority Validation dialog box Columns on the Authority Validation Dialog Box The following columns see Table 9 1 display in the Authority Validation dialog box Table 9 1 Authority Validation Dialog Box Column Description Heading Name Title Name Title or Subject Tag s MARC record tags being validated Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 9 2 February 2004
35. ig 856 links ME E3 c images ng_toc tif DOS file not found c images hawaii tif DOS file not found National Geographic Online National Geographic s VOYAGER INDEXI Sierra Club Www Page Ecoregions of Hawaii c images article1 tif DOS file not found c images articlez tif DOS file not found en Figure 2 17 856 Links dialog box Table 2 2 Link Status Link Status Description Valid Links Display underlined and in blue Invalid Links Display in red with a diagnostic message Invalid links can be corrected by editing the 856 field in the MARC record Clicking a valid link blue and under lined initiates that connection Voyager handles three types of links See Table 2 3 e URL including URN and DOI e Images on a server e DOS Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 23 Table 2 3 Link Type Link Type Description URL Links If you click a URL link it will launch the Web browser and display the specified file In order for DOI and URN links to be verified the addresses of the DOI and URN handler servers must be entered in the DOI and URN fields on the Validation tab of the Session Defaults and Preferences window See 10 8 for more information about DOI and URN 856 links Links to Images ona Use either Image Server or a Web browser as deter Server mined by the name specified on
36. 006 008BooksBiography Ly Le Figure A 8 Sample 006 Books stanza in a Bmarcfix cfg file In the Cataloging module the template in Figure A 8 displays the grid as illustrated in Figure A 9 for the 006 fixed field of bibliographic records The procedure for accessing the 006 field grid is shown in Procedure A 1 Accessing the 006 Field Grid on page A 11 Procedure A 1 Accessing the 006 Field Grid Use the following to access the 006 field grid 1 Click the 006 button on the MARC tab 2 Click the New button Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 11 Result The Additional Materials Characteristics dialog box opens See Figure A 9 006 Additional Material Characteristics a Books No illustrations No illustrations No illustrations Unknown or not specified None of the following No specified nature of contents No specified nature of contents No specified nature of contents No specified nature of contents _ Not a government publication SA 0 Not a conference publication Figure A 9 Grid for the 006 field of a bibliographic record Defining Your Own Keyboard Shortcuts In the stanzas of the new tag tables you are able to specify keyboard access keys shortcuts for each tab of the fixed field grid templates This allows you to use a keyboard shortcut as opposed to the m
37. 1 0 Index 006 008Books Index Sy Lz 0 Literary Form 006 008BooksLiteraryForm 33 1 0 Biography 006 008BooksBiography 34 1 _ Language Language 35 3 eng Modified Record OO08ModifiedRecord BO hy os Cataloging Source O08CatalogingSource 39 1 d Figure A 15 Sample template configuration stanza from a Bmarcfix cfg file A IMPORTANT You can only modify column 1 and column 5 in this particular stanza type unless anew MARC standard is implemented or an error is discovered Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 19 Column 1 The first column of the stanza is the description that is displayed for a particular tab in the Cataloging module See Figure A 17 This column can be changed to match your preferences such as for internationalization purposes Column 2 This column is used for two purposes e To define the name of the drop down menu stanza name that will define the valid values for that particular drop down menu e To define that field as a text box non drop down menu box at which point a stanza defining the textbox is not required For the latter the keyword lt lt lt TEXT gt gt gt is used NOTE lt lt lt TEXT gt gt gt is a reserved term used to describe to the program that the grid cell has text entered into it from the user and not from a drop down menu stanza When using this value a mask value has to be entered
38. 110a gt ft lt 245a gt lt 245b gt td lt 260a gt lt 260b gt lt 260c gt F lt fw 035a gt 773 lt 6 VRID gt Many of the tags in Table 5 13 use only derivation fields Others use combinations such as Tag 100 and 245 Tag 505 contains static text that is copied directly into the new record Notice Tag 773 contains derivation fields in both the t lt c gt and t lt tc c gt formats for the same subfield A IMPORTANT When you are creating new records using a template containing derivation fields the system includes any information that has been added to the source record even if the record has not been saved For example if you edited a source record by adding subject information 650abc then created a new record using the template in Table 5 13 the new record would include the subject information from the source record even though you have not yet saved the source record to the database Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 17 Session Defaults and Preferences You can access the Session Defaults and Preferences dialog box by selecting Options gt Preferences From this dialog box you can change a number of defaults which are presented on seven tabs e General e Validation e Work Flow e item Defaults e Folders e Mapping e Colors and Fonts The defaults you choose are saved when you exit the Cataloging module An
39. 12 Pick And Scan Item Options Items Barcode D vI Select File aegis Texzont 1 DOC Cataloging PAS Files for Processinal 4 74905 Title Baskets of rural America 7 Gloria Roth Teleki Enum Chron Holding Location Main Permanent Location Main Temporary Location Permanent Type book Temporary Type Media Type ltem Status Not Charged 7 At Bindery Statistical Category Update Holding Status N A Update ltem Status Processed xl Print List Save to File Figure 7 12 Processing report window The bottom half of the Pick and Scan dialog box a scrolling window displays basic item information of scanned items and any error messages that may accompany the action specified Basic item information displayed in the Processing Report includes the following Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 7 9 e Title e Enum chron e Barcode e Location e Status Any item field that has changed as a result of processing displays the before and after values separated by aslash All successfully completed transactions are indicated with a status of Processed Values that have been cleared display as lt cleared gt Whenever a non existent item barcode is entered the Processing Report indicates that too See Figure 7 13 Pick And Scan Item Options Items Barcode 53794 Ea Select File Rracess Bile Updal
40. 13 Table 5 7 Example 3 Derivation field If the active source record contains 022 nn ty 1234 5678 or the 022 tag does not exist in the active record And the cataloging template contains 773 nn x lt 022a gt Then the new record contains 773 nn x subfield data empty Table 5 8 Example 4 Derivation field Rule If the derivation field has the format lt tc c gt and the corre sponding tag exists in the active record but the subfields do not match or the corresponding tag does not exist in the active record add only the tag If the active source record contains 022 nn ty 1234 5678 or the 022 tag does not exist in the active record And the cataloging template contains 773 nn lt x 022a gt Then the new record contains 773 nn no subfield or subfield data Table 5 9 Example 5 Derivation field Rule If the format of the derivation field is 4 lt c gt and a subfield is repeated in the active bibliographic record map all occurrences of the subfield into the new record in the order in which they appear NOTE This format adds one new tag followed by the subfield data separated by spaces If the active source record contains 022 nn a 1234 5678 022 nn a 2234 5678 022 nn fa 3334 5678 And the cataloging template contains 773 nn tx lt 022a gt Then the new record contains 773 nn
41. 2 28 Leader dialog box for holdings information 2 38 2 29 007 Button 2 39 2 30 007 Physical Description dialog box for holdings information 2 40 2 31 007 Physical Description dialog with grid displayed 2 41 2 32 008 Button 2 42 2 33 008 General Description Holding dialog box 2 43 2 34 Selecting a call number hierarchy 2 47 2 35 Setting call number hierarchy to a non corresponding default holdings item location 2 48 2 36 Get call number from bib record menu option 2 49 2 37 Message for replacing an existing call number with a new one 2 50 2 38 Message for replacing an existing call number with a new one from a different classification scheme 2 51 2 39 Holdings Record System Tab 2 52 2 40 Holdings Record Bib Title s Tab 2 53 2 41 Holdings Record History Tab 2 55 2 42 Example of an Item Record 2 56 2 43 Enabling Disabling the Check for Duplicate Barcodes option 2 57 2 44 Status Button 2 60 2 45 Item Status dialog box 2 63 2 46 Blue Up and Red Down Buttons 2 64 2 47 Statistical Categories Button 2 64 2 48 Item Statistical Categories dialog box 2 65 2 49 Blue Up and Red Down Buttons 2 65 A 3 Creating Opening and Viewing Records 3 1 New Record Button 3 2 3 2 Selecting a template for a new record 3 3 3 3 New bibliographic record template example 3 4 3 4 Error message for selecting an inappropriate template 3 4 3 5 Error message for selecting an inappropriate template 3 6 3 6 Create Holdings Button 3 6 End
42. 3 60 listing each database name and the status of each search The Stop Search button displays if your search returned over 100 hits It allows you to interrupt the search if the status is Searching or Receiving Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 64 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records DatabaseName Search Failed Done 6 Records Done 4 Records Stop Search Show Results Figure 3 60 Search Status dialog box e For simultaneous searches click the Show Results button to view the results in the Titles Index list box see Figure 3 61 Titles Index Full Title Author Database Z by Carol Carrick pictures by Don C arrick Carol 239 50 on Viper Amazing the incredible super dog by Crosb Bonsall Crosby Newell 239 50 on Viper Bonsall Angus and the ducks told and pictured by Flack Marjorie 1897 1958 239 50 on Viper Marjorie Flack Atlantic classics Second series UB Atlantic classics Second series 420012 Bad moon rising edited by Thomas M Disch Disch Thomas Ml A20012 Bishop s Basset Gibbs Jessie O Connell 239 50 on Viper x Cancel Search Status Behesh SelectAll Clear Al MARC 43 Records Found Search Command dogs Figure 3 61 Titles Index following a simultaneous search a TIP For searches combining local and remote databases the Titles Index displays records in the sort order speci
43. 38 2 39 2 42 2 44 2 45 2 51 2 52 2 53 2 53 2 54 2 55 2 55 2 55 2 56 2 57 2 58 2 58 2 58 2 59 2 60 2 64 Record Types and Creating Introduction Voyager s Cataloging module provides a powerful and user friendly means by which MARC 21 based records are created and maintained You can create authority bibliographic holdings and item records using the convenient and straightforward record displays Integration between Cataloging and the Online Public Access Catalog OPAC means that you can easily build and maintain a complete MARC 21 based catalog Types of Records Voyager uses MARC 21 standard authority bibliographic and holdings records and a Voyager defined item record see Table 2 1 on page 2 1 The bibliographic record is the key component in the relationship of these different types of records See Figure 2 1 Table 2 1 Description of Record Types Authority Bibliographic Holdings Item MFHD Format MARC 21 MARC 21 MARC 21 Voyager Linked to Bibliographic Bibliographic Holdings Source Original or Original or Original Original Utility Utility Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 1 Authority records are optional and link to bibliographic records as either type of record is saved A Holdings record is also known as a MFHD MARC Format for Holdings Data Item records are used for circulat
44. 5 21 Folders Files tab Cataloging module bib field 5 22 thumbnails 2 21 Titles Index 3 40 Relevance column 3 34 Titles Index list box 3 32 truncation searching 3 30 Type column Voyager Connection Options dialog box 3 61 U Unicode Bulklmport C 8 cataloging templates C 9 database conversion C 4 diacritics 6 1 C 3 font options C 1 Leader position 9 C 2 MARC21 compliance considerations C 3 message logs database conversion C 5 nc in the Title Bar C 4 non converted records C 4 overview C 1 Special Character Entry 6 1 subfield character C 9 Unlinking records 3 82 Update 4 6 update record alert 4 6 URI search option 3 29 3 32 3 38 3 50 URN 2 22 10 7 user defined alternate search button 3 29 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Index V Validating records 9 1 9 2 validation of bib heading 4 11 Variable fields 505 field 2 24 authority 2 33 2 34 bibliographic 2 14 2 24 font bold for 10 19 font sizes of 10 19 holdings 2 44 Verify 856 links 2 22 10 7 view holdings locations 3 79 line items 3 68 Voyager Connection Options dialog box 3 59 3 60 3 61 Available Locations section 3 61 Connection column 3 61 Database Name column 3 61 Information about section 3 61 Selected Locations section 3 61 Type column 3 61 voyager ini file 3 30 W Window menu 10 24 Work files 4 5
45. 5 22 Font bold 10 19 size 10 19 Free Text radio button 3 31 G get call number from bib record 2 45 Getting Started 1 1 prerequisite skills and knowledge 1 1 global headings change 9 5 batch job 9 15 H Heading Type field 3 42 Heading Types Filter 3 37 Headings Index 4 11 Headings List 3 40 headings searching 3 36 3 47 Help menu 10 25 history searching 3 53 History tab 3 53 3 54 authority record 2 35 sorting 2 36 bibliographic record 2 26 sorting 2 27 holdings record 2 54 sorting 2 55 Holdings records 007 field 2 39 008 field 2 42 2 44 colors of 10 16 create 3 5 description 2 36 get call number from bib record 2 45 History tab 2 54 leader 2 38 2 39 linking to other records 3 80 3 81 3 83 locations 3 79 MARC tab 2 37 retrieving 3 75 3 76 suppress from OPAC 2 37 System tab 2 51 unlinking from bibs 3 82 variable field 2 44 Verify 856 links 2 22 I Image Server creating bibliographic record 3 25 Importing records 3 11 3 14 Information about section Voyager Connection Options dialog box 3 61 initialization file voyager ini 3 30 Insert URL from Browser 4 3 Invalid records 3 24 item searching by builder 3 49 3 51 searching by headings non keyword 3 36 3 47 searching by history 3 53 searching by keyword 3 34 Item menu 10 23 Item records create 3 8 description 2 56 linking to other records 3 80 3 81 3 83 resequencing 3
46. 78 retrieving 3 77 statistical categories 2 64 2 65 statuses 2 60 2 62 K keyword searching 3 30 3 34 Keyword tab 3 30 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Index a Help 10 25 Item 10 23 L Options 10 24 Window 10 24 Labels spine and piece 4 14 Leader authority 2 29 2 30 bibliographic 2 4 2 6 N holdings 2 38 2 39 Limit button 3 32 3 38 3 50 3 56 limiting your search 3 54 narrower term 3 45 Linking records 3 80 3 81 3 83 non keyword unlinking holdings from bibs 3 82 searching 3 36 3 47 list box Non Keyword tab 3 36 3 47 Titles Index 3 32 Locations holdings 3 79 a Locations Filter 3 38 O Logging in 1 4 On line shelf list 3 38 Ee OPAC Attachments in 2 20 M Table of Contents in 2 24 Verify 856 links 2 22 MARC Record Derivation OPAC suppress from derivation field 5 9 5 17 bibliographic records 2 26 2 53 example 5 12 5 16 holdings records 2 37 format 5 9 Opening multiple subfields 5 12 records 3 8 3 10 non matching subfield 5 12 option reading 5 11 authority rule 5 12 5 16 OK to export 2 34 explanation 5 8 5 9 bibliographic overview 5 8 5 12 OK to export 2 25 using cataloging template 5 8 5 18 Suppress from OPAC 2 26 example 5 16 5 17 holdings saving record 5 17 OK to export 2 52 MARC tab 2 3 Suppress from OPAC 2 53 authority record 2 28 Opt
47. C Browse Heading Types Filter Locations Filter Art and Architecture Thesaurus CIESIN indexing vocabulary Canadian subject headings Dissertation Abstracts Online zi Search for Not applicable Mirit Figure 3 55 Remote button on Search dialog box When clicked the Remote button opens the Voyager Connection Options dialog box see Figure 3 56 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 59 Voyager Connection Options Available Locations Selected Locations _ Database Name Type Connection a ie Citation KC 2001 2 Bibliographic Voyager m Library of Congress Bibliographic 23950 239 50 m Northwestern Bibliographic 23950 University 239 50 Purdue University Bibliographic Voyager m Purdue 239 50 Bibliographic 23950 wlafdb zi Information about GEOBASE GEOBASE Connect Cancel Figure 3 56 Voyager Connection Options dialog box 3 60 Use the Remote button to select the remote database s from which you want to do the following e Search individually or simultaneously e Import records from The Voyager Connection Options dialog box lists the databases you have access to as defined in the System Administration module The name connection and type for the databases are set in the Database Definition work space of theVoyager System Administration module NOTE Y
48. D73 1984 Figure 2 39 Holdings Record System Tab OK to Export Option 2 52 The OK to export option is used by libraries that export records See the Bulk Export of MARC Records section of the Voyager Technical User s Guide for details on exporting records Checking the OK to export box confirms that the holdings record is acceptable for export You must click the Save to Database button for it to take effect If the OK to export box already contains a check mark that indicates that an operator has either approved the record for export at an earlier date or the record was automatically authorized for export when it was imported To automatically mark records as OK to export see the Bulk Export of MARC Records section of the Voyager Technical User s Guide When OK to export is set and the record has been saved to the database two radio buttons become active on the System tab These radio buttons allow you to either select the last date on which the OK to export option was set or to select today s date Change to Today radio button If you select Change to Today and then click the Save to Database button the OK to export date will change to today s date NOTE The OK to export option resets during the actual export process The date operator and location at which the OK to export option was last set display below Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Un
49. ESC can be used to close certain dialog boxes The space bar can be used to highlight selections in list boxes Once a selection has been highlighted in a list box you can press the Enter key to select it Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 1 3 Logging into Cataloging Before you can begin working in Voyager s Cataloging module you must log in with your operator ID and password Your operator ID and password determine what Cataloging operations you can perform as well as at which Cataloging locations you can perform them Your system administrator defines this security information in the Voyager System Administration module See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details The procedure for logging into cataloging is described in Procedure 1 1 Logging into Cataloging Procedure 1 1 Logging into Cataloging 1 4 Use the following to access Voyager Cataloging Open the Cataloging module on your PC Result The Login dialog box opens see Figure 1 2 Operator Id Password ae 5 Endeavor Information Systems Inc Figure 1 2 The Voyager Cataloging login dialog box Enter your Operator Id Password and click OK or Exit Result The main Cataloging window displays if you successfully entered your Operator Id and Password Using Exit closes the log in dialog box without logging you into the Cataloging module NOTE Voyager al
50. Farge 54893 Laughing Boy by Oliver La Farge 58881 Lau r La Farge u e Retrieve Replace Merge using profile FLNR spiace x Clear All Close Figure 4 4 Bibliographic Dedupe Detection dialog box e You can view the MARC record of any of the duplicates by selecting a record from the list and clicking Retrieve Click Clear All to deselect all of the selected records in the list e To add the record to the database as a new record overriding the existence of duplicates click Add As New Record e If you want the incoming record to replace or be merged with one of the records in the list use Procedure 4 5 Replace Merge Incoming Record on page 4 9 The procedure for replacing or merging an incoming record with a record from the Bibliographic Dedupe Detection dialog box is shown in Procedure 4 5 Replace Merge Incoming Record on page 4 9 Procedure 4 5 Replace Merge Incoming Record Use the following to replace or merge incoming records 1 Make sure that the target record in the list and only the target record is highlighted Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 9 2 Click the drop down arrow to select with which replace or merge profile you want to import This list only includes Replace or Merge profiles Click the Replace Merge using profile button No more duplicate checking is performed and the record is replaced or m
51. Headings Search Peace 35 Headings Found Figure 3 43 See Also search results The procedure for performing a Non Keyword search is shown in Procedure 3 8 Non Keyword searching on page 3 47 Procedure 3 8 Non Keyword searching Use the following to perform a Non Keyword search 1 Access the Search dialog box and click the Non Keyword tab 2 Select the type of search wanted from the drop down menu see Figure 3 44 Keyword Non Keyword Builder History Search by Find Title lt x Browse Not applicable Mfhd Call Number Corporate Name Series Personal Name Main Series Entry lt Figure 3 44 Type of search Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 47 OPTIONAL 3 Select an option button of either Find or Browse if you are performing a heading or call number search OPTIONAL 4 Select a Heading Types Filter if doing a heading or call number search Hold the Ctrl key down to select more that one filter OPTIONAL 5 Select a Locations Filter if applicable from the list box es Hold the Ctrl key down to select more that one filter OPTIONAL 6 Click the Limits button to display the Search Limits dialog box and further limit your search See Search Limits on page 3 54 7 Enter your search term in the Search For field see Figure 3 45 Kepword Non Keyword Builder History
52. If you select one of the profiles the system retrieves any records related to the source record based on the profile Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 1 5 2 It is the presence of the tag subfield override in a profile and the existence of those tags subfields in the active record that determines whether or not any profile names display from Related Records Before Related Records displays on the menu bar you must have at least one bibliographic linking profile created in the Voyager System Administration module NOTE For the purpose of this discussion assume that three linking profiles have been added to System Administration Table 5 1 Example of profile names and overrides Profile Name Tag Subfield Override 776Host 776 tx 780Preceding 780 tx 785Succeding 785 tx If the source record currently active in Cataloging contains any of the tag subfields listed in Table 5 1 Related Records displays on the menu bar e If the source record contained only a 776 x 776Host would be the only profile listed when Related Records is clicked e f the source record contained a 776 x and a 780 x 776Host and 780Preceding displays in the list e If the source record contained all three tag subfields all three profile names display in the list Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager wi
53. Performing a Builder search 3 51 3 10 Accessing searches from the History tab 3 54 3 11 Setting Search Limits 3 56 3 12 Searching remote databases 3 61 3 13 Display Record in WebVoyage Example 3 67 3 14 Using the Acq in the Cat Function 3 70 3 15 Retrieve Holdings 3 75 3 16 Retrieve Authority 3 77 3 17 Retrieve Items 3 77 3 18 Linking Items to Bibliographic Records 3 80 3 19 Relink an Item to a Different Holdings 3 81 3 20 Unlinking Holdings and Bib Records 3 82 De 4 Changing Saving and Printing Information 4 1 Editing a Record 4 1 4 2 Deleting a Record 4 3 4 3 Adding a URL to an 856 Field 4 4 4 4 Changing Owning Library 4 4 4 5 Replace Merge Incoming Record 4 9 4 6 Validating a Heading 4 11 4 7 Copy a Record 4 13 4 8 Print Spine and Piece Labels 4 14 5 Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking 5 1 Creating a New Template 5 5 5 2 Editing a Template 5 6 5 3 Deleting a Template 5 8 5 4 Defining a Default Template 5 19 5 5 Defining a Default Folder 5 23 5 6 Creating New Records Using Templates 5 25 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page xxiv February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Procedures 5 7 Creating New Records Using a Default Folder 5 26 6 Diacritics and Non Roman Characters 6 1 Special Character Entry 6 2 6 2 Special Character Mode 6 3 Ess 7 Pick and Scan 7 1 Using Pick and Scan 7 2 D 8 Templates 8 1 Creating a New Template 8 2 8 2 Ed
54. Prete Mel Gear eal Auth Delete l g k Figure 9 3 Global Heading Change amp Preview Queues NOTE If you have a bibliographic record with a name title heading that for example contains both a 1xx and a 240 243 or 245 or it contains a 400 410 411 700 710 711 800 810 or 811 it is only changed if an authority record which contains a nameftitle heading is changed If a non name title authority record such as a Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 9 7 name authority heading with a matching 1xx heading is changed this has no effect on a namez title bibliographic record For example suppose you have a bibliographic record that contains the following 100 a Adams John Q 243 ta My life with Abigail a biography You also have authority record 1 that has the name but not the title in the 1xx as in the following example 100 a Adams John Q If you change the 100 fa of authority record 1 to Adams John Quincy the above bibliographic record is not changed Assume you have an authority record 2 that contains a name title heading such as the following example 100 a Adams John Q t My life with Abigail a biography If you changed the 100 a of authority record 2 to Adams John Quincy that change is reflected in your bibliographic record Sample Global Headings Change Work Flow The following is an ex
55. Print Template Spine 4 18 Print Template Spine Bibliographic 4 17 Templates 4 17 Statistical categories for items 2 64 2 65 Status button 3 66 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode IN 7 Statuses for items 2 60 2 62 Stop button 3 33 3 41 Stop Search button 3 64 subfield element in derivation field 5 9 multiple in derivation field 5 12 non matching in derivation field 5 12 System tab authority record 2 34 bibliographic record 2 24 holdings record 2 51 T tab Builder 3 49 History 3 53 3 54 Keyword 3 30 Non Keyword 3 36 3 47 tag element in derivation field 5 9 Tag Tables folder 5 21 5 24 Tag tables MARC A 1 A 23 template 5 5 5 8 creating 5 5 5 6 default authority 5 5 5 21 5 24 bibliographic 5 5 5 21 5 24 defining 5 19 5 23 holdings 5 5 5 21 5 24 using to create new record 5 25 deleting 5 8 editing 5 6 5 7 Related Records creating 5 8 5 18 derivation field 5 9 5 17 example 5 16 5 17 explanation 5 8 5 9 overview 5 8 5 12 saving 5 17 using to create new record 5 25 5 27 Template field 5 26 Session Defaults and Preferences Cataloging module 5 24 Template folder 5 21 5 24 Template Spine Label Printing 4 17 Templates creating 8 2 default 10 13 deleting 8 3 description of 8 1 editing 8 2 8 3 Templates section Folders Files tab Cataloging module
56. Procedure 2 17 Getting Call Number from Bibliographic Record 2 48 Use the following to get a call number from a bibliographic record Retrieve an existing MFHD using standard Cataloging functions IMPORTANT It is not required to have the MFHD s corresponding bib record open to use the get call number from bib record function However you can have the bib record open if you wish The system will know which bib record corresponds to the MFHD because bib records and MFHDs are linked in Voyager When you are ready to insert the call number select Record gt Get call number from bib record from the Cataloging toolbar see Figure 2 36 or use the Ctrl n keystroke This causes the call number to be placed in the 852 h and 852 i field of the MFHD The call number is automatically placed in the appropriate field regardless of where your cursor is positioned in the MFHD fields Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating NOTE If you only have a bib record open but not a MFHD the Record gt Get call number from bib record menu option is grayed out and the Ctrl n keystroke does not do anything Yoyager Cataloging File Edit Record Display Options Window Help New gt AN amp gt Search ni New Make a Copy 212 3 4 New Hidgs Get Hidas New Items Get items Hierarchy Help Save to DB Change owning library
57. Search by selection any correspond ing filter selections and a Search for value See Find and Browse Searches on page 3 38 Unlabeled field containing a drop down menu of searches available Users can select a Heading Type filter to further limit a search Result records must contain the heading type selected and match the search criteria NOTE These filters may be suppressed in the System Administration module Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 37 Table 3 5 Non Keyword tab Name Type Description Locations Filter List Users can select a Locations filter to further limit a search when doing call number searches Locations are defined in the System Administration module Rf ve By limiting a call number search by location you can get an online shelf list Search for Text Box Enter your search term s or phrases using quota tion marks in the Search for field Use a question mark to truncate the search term Do Search Button Executes the search Cancel Button Cancels the search Clear Button Deletes the search term s in the Search for field Remote Button The Remote button if configured allows users to search remote databases See Remote Databases on page 3 58 Limit Button Opens the Search Limits dialog box where you can limit your search by language location date or other vari
58. Unicode 10 17 10 18 Table 10 7 Record types available for color change Color Fonts Tab Dialog Box Group Record Type Record Hierarchy e Bibliographic e Holdings e Item e Bound With Global Heading Change Hierarchy e Level 1 Old Heading e Level 2 New Heading e Level 3 Auth Heading Result A menu of options displays Si TIP Change the Conversion colors to highlight records that display in Cataloging but were not converted These are the same records that are identified by nc in the Title Bar See Non Converted Records nc on page C 4 for more information Select Text Color Back color or Reset Color depending on the color you want to change Result The Color dialog box opens Select a color and click OK Result The color is displayed in the Sample box NOTE To reset the colors for one type of record to the default click the record type button and select Reset Color from the submenu Click the drop down arrow for Row Marker Symbol to select the type of indicator used to identify the current row in MARC records Result This sets the row marker symbol to your preference Click the drop down arrow for font Name to select the font to be used Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Result This changes the font to the one you prefer a TIP The Lucida Sans Unicode or if yo
59. an 856 field is shown in Procedure 4 3 Adding a URL to an 856 Field on page 4 4 Procedure 4 3 Adding a URL to an 856 Field Use the following to add a URL to an 856 field 1 Open up your web browser and pull up the Web site whose URL you want to add 2 Open the record or create a new record into which you want to insert the URL 3 Select Edit gt Insert URL from Browser or click Ctrl U Result The URL will be added to a new 856 field in the record You can then edit the new 856 field if necessary Change Owning Library Owning libraries are assigned to locations in System Administration Institutions must specify that bibliographic records belong to an owning library When a user logs into Cataloging they must select a cataloging location which is associated with an owning library from a list determined by their security clearance Depending on the security clearance and on the cataloging location selected the user will or will not be able to view update add or delete records from various owing libraries The procedure for changing the owning library is shown in Procedure 4 4 Changing Owning Library on page 4 4 NOTE This assumes that you have the appropriate security clearance to perform this change Procedure 4 4 Changing Owning Library Use the following to change the owning library 1 Display the bibliographic record that you want to change the owning library for Endeavor Information Systems
60. an item that may or may not be currently charged to another patron A hold request never affects the loan interval if the item is currently charged Automatically assigned Short Loan Request One or more patrons have placed a short loan request for an item Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 61 Table 2 11 Possible Statuses Listed According to Rank Remote Storage One or more patrons have placed a Request request for an item that is in a remote stor age area Call Slip Request One or more patrons have placed a request for an item in a closed stacks area Discharged An item has been discharged and is cur rently on the shelf or in its way there and is in effect until the expiration of the circula tion policy group shelving interval Auto matically assigned Not Charged Should be on the shelf and is assigned after discharge and expiration of shelving interval for the applicable circulation policy group Automatically assigned Catalog Review The item has been marked for Catalog review May be manually assigned Circulation Review The item has been marked for Circulation review May be manually assigned Claims returned A patron reports an item as having been returned but there is no record of dis charge Usually such an item is also over due and possibly missing or lost May be manually assigned This statu
61. automatically saved to this file instead of prompting you for a filename If the file does not exist it will be created the first time Cataloging attempts to save to the file Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 13 Table 10 5 Folders Files tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Save to Local File In the Save to Local File block you can specify the file to e File which you want bibliographic records to be saved when you use the Save to Database and to Local File option with or without Close Enter the filename in the File field or click the ellipses to search for the file to which you want to save Click the Charac ter Set drop down arrow to select the character set format in which you want the records to be saved e Character Set NOTE If no filename is entered into the File field the Save to Database and to Local File option is disabled If the file is specified but does not currently exist it is created at the next Save to Database and Local File Mapping Tab Figure 10 7 Customize the options on the Mapping tab see Figure 10 7 to match your preferences using Table 10 6 for a description of each option Voyager Cataloging allows you to import records from other formats Use the Mapping tab to identify the format of the records being imported locally or remotely Saving records to the da
62. bound with information displays in a hierarchy dialog box The hierarchical tree displays in colors that you set in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences see Session Defaults and Preferences on page 10 1 El Figure 3 10 Hierarchy Button If more information is associated with the Bibliographic ID or Holdings a plus sign displays to the left of the preceding ID number When you click the plus sign the Holdings Item or Bound Withs display see Figure 3 11 If you want to display a record highlight it and then click the Retrieve button Click Close to close the Holdings and Items dialog box Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records NOTE Holdings records also display any associated on order information Holdings and Items for bib 246 Title Owning Library Adventures of ideas by Alfred North Whitehead Training Master DB MFHD Location Call Number Order Status Main CB53 w5 item Location E item Type Enum Chron Year Copy te Main P Book 0 No Figure 3 11 Holdings and Items for Bibliographic Records Importing Records You can import MARC formatted bibliographic and authority records into Voyager using Cataloging s importing features Any MARC 21 record can be imported including records you download from a cataloging utility such as OCLC or RLIN You
63. call number as specified in the 852 field of the holdings record Location and Type You can add to or change the information described in Table 2 8 by selecting from the appropriate drop down list s However if a location is assigned to an item and that location does not belong to a Circulation Group as defined in System Administration then that item cannot be charged to any patron Table 2 8 Item Record Location Options Field Name Description Perm Loc The item s permanent location Type The item s permanent type Temp Loc The item s temporary location if any Temp Type The item s temporary assigned type if any Media Type The item s media type if any Item Holdings You can add to or change the information described in Table 2 9 by entering the appropriate text Table 2 9 Item Record Holdings Options Field Name Description Enumeration The item s enumeration such as the volume number Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 58 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Table 2 9 Item Record Holdings Options Field Name Description Chronology The item s chronology such as April Year The enumeration year if serially published or the publication year if an individual item Caption Any additional title information Free Text Any additional item i
64. can specify the character set to which you want imported records mapped such as the following in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences e Latin1 non Unicode e MARC 21 MARC8 non Unicode e MARC21 UTF 8 e OCLC non Unicode e RLIN legacy non Unicode e Voyager legacy non Unicode See Mapping Tab Figure 10 7 on page 10 14 for more information Depending on the Import Replace profile you have established in the System Administration module imported records can either replace existing records merge with existing records be added to the database or not be added to the database See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details on Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 11 Import Replace profiles The Import Replace profile you establish in System Administration is defined in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences See Session Defaults and Preferences on page 10 1 for more information Records can be imported in the following ways through the Voyager Cataloging module e From a file a new file or one you previously accessed e From another database NOTE Records can also be imported in batch mode which is a method of processing many records as a group versus one at a time This method utilizes the Voyager Bulklmport and Prebulk programs For more information about utilizing this method for importing see the Voyager Technica
65. can use this same format to determine how the system should handle non matching subfields You can decide whether or not the tags and indicators specified in the derivation field are added to the new record if there are no matching subfields in the source record For example if the source record contains the following data 022 nn ty 1234 5678 and you define a template with a derivation field like this 773 nn lt tx 022a gt the new record includes only the 773 nn without any subfield data Rules and Examples for Derivation Fields 5 12 Depending on the data in the source record and the format of the derivation fields in the template you could have many different results The tables beginning with Table 5 5 through Table 5 12 describe specific rules for derivation fields A IMPORTANT You can map a tag subfield combination from the source record into the same tag subfield combination or a different tag subfield combination in the new record In the tables below the examples are mapping information Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking from the tag subfield combination in the source record to another different tag subfield combination in the target record Table 5 5 Example 1 Derivation field Rule If the derivation field has the format lt c gt no space between and lt where the first
66. cfg files You can alter the tab layout as per your preferences as long as you cut and paste whole stanza rows For example to display the Printed Music tab before the Books tab in the bibliographic record 006 grid change the 006Code stanza in the Bmarcfix cfg file to the order highlighted in Figure A 14 006Code c P rinted Music 006 Music a amp Books 006 Books Figure A 14 Arrangement of tabs Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 17 Grid Templates in the Cataloging Module The grid template declaration indicates the template that the program uses for each tab of the fixed fields These templates are indicated on the far right column of each 00xCode stanza in the Xmarcfix cfg files In the example in Figure A 14 the Printed Music tab uses a template called 006_Music Tabs can use either the same template or they can use different templates The contents and structure of each template is defined in the 00x template stanzas See Template Stanzas 00x_ for more information Template Stanzas 00x_ 00x stanzas in Xmarcfix cfg files have five columns in which you define the following for each record type A The selections you have on the grid for each code type tab in the Cataloging module Whether the grid includes drop down menus or text boxes If drop down menus are included this stanza references the name of th
67. change delete or clear data with the simple wand of an item barcode or by processing a file that lists a group of barcodes Adhering to all operator security profiles including owning library security Pick and Scan enables authorized operators to change the following e Holding location e Permanent location e Temporary location e Permanent type e Temporary type e Media type e tem status e Statistical categories Pick and Scan is an especially useful tool for libraries undertaking significant inventory and maintenance projects by making it possible for staff to use scanning technology hand held devices and or batch files for processing large groups of changes Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 7 1 Using Pick and Scan The procedure for using Pick and Scan is shown in Procedure 7 1 Using Pick and Scan on page 7 2 Procedure 7 1 Using Pick and Scan Use the following to work with the Pick and Scan feature 1 Click File gt Pick and Scan or Ctrl l Result The Pick and Scan dialog box opens See Figure 7 1 Pick And Scan Items r i r Item Status 7 Halding Location No Change z No Change F CleaAll Permanent Location No Change 7 F Statistical Categories aaa s Temporary Location No Change 7 No Change I ClearAll Permanent Type No Change z T Delete Item Temporary Type No Change z Media T
68. click the Save button Figure 4 1 This command tries to save the current record or template to the same work folder from which the record was opened If the record was opened from a work folder it is saved to the same work folder However if the record was retrieved from the OPAC Voyager asks you to name the record or template and save it in a work folder To save a record to a different location use the Save As command Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 5 Figure 4 1 Save Button When a record is saved to a work folder it is not validated against authority records or the MARC tag table Also because the Suppress From OPAC check box is not a part of the MARC 21 record that information is not saved when the record is saved as a work record Each time that you retrieve a work record in order to save it to the database the Suppress From OPAC check box must be marked appropriately In addition if a record is saved to a work folder and then opened in another Cataloging session for a different database the record overlays any existing record without any duplicate checking This is because Voyager automatically overlays any record with an identical 001 The correct procedure is to Import the record into another database Update Record Alert If you modify a record and save it and Voyager discovers that the record has been modified by another user while you
69. communication between the Acquisitions and Cataloging modules Acq in the Cat allows you to pull up and edit a line item in the Acquisitions module from the associated bibliographic or holdings record in the Cataloging module In this way you can view all of the information related to a specific title without performing any additional searching thereby saving valuable time and effort Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 68 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records System Administration Setup In order to use the Acq in the Cat feature there is only one System Administration configuration you need to set This configuration pertains to Acquisitions security permissions Specifically the operator s established in System Administration that you want to use the Acq in the Cat feature must have at least view only access to line items in Acquisitions If the operator s does not have at least view only access to line items in Acquisitions they will not be able to use the Acq in the Cat feature In fact the menu option in the Cataloging module that facilitates Acq in the Cat functionality is grayed out See 3 70 for more details on the Acq in the Cat feature You establish view only access or add update and or delete access to line items in Acquisitions on the Profile Values tab of the appropriate Acquisitions Serials Profile Definition in the System Administration module
70. copy number enumeration and chronology fields in an item record are used to augment the OPAC display when the item is charged out or has another informational status Bibliographic Records Bibliographic records contain all the bibliographic information for a library item The bibliographic record displays with the following three tabs e MARC tab e System tab e History tab For information about creating a bibliographic record see Creating a Record on page 3 1 Only the MARC and System tabs display when you initially create a bibliographic record Subsequently the History tab displays when an action is taken against the record such as saving it to the database MARC Tab The MARC tab of the bibliographic record see Figure 2 2 contains a Leader an 005 fixed field an 008 fixed field and variable fields It can also contain multiple 006 and 007 fields All values correspond to the published MARC standard Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 3 ad Voyager Cataloging File Edit Record RelatedRecords Display Options Window Help A 2 23 5 e Save to DB New Hidgs Get Hidgs Mew tems Get tems Hierarchy Help MARC System Histor Leader N72Nnam PPNA hin ong i j oz 751124 1975 nyu a ag 14 12 Subiiskd Data ta 75010075 fa 0525061401 fe 12 50 Ja 0525474099 fp pbk fa ocm01866679 ta DLC te DLC td m c td SHC fa mus ta SHOM
71. dialog box Print Record Ctrl P Prints an active record Print Label Displays the Print Labels dialog box Ctril G Global Headings Change Displays the Global Headings Change Queue Pick and Scan Ctrl I Facilitates mass changes change delete or clear data to item records and associated hold ings records by authorized staff Exit Exits the Cataloging module Edit Menu The contents of the Edit menu are shown in Table 10 9 Table 10 9 Edit Menu Option Description Cut Cuts the highlighted text and places it on the clip Ctrl x board Copy Copies the highlighted text and places it on the Ctrl c clipboard Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 10 20 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options EES ea Table 10 9 Edit Menu Option Description Paste Inserts the text stored on the clipboard and Ctrl v pastes the rows above the target row All of the MARC view records contain a dummy row that displays at the end of the variable fields The pur pose of the dummy row is to allow you to paste into the last editable row since the action of paste will insert the information before the marked row You can not do anything to the dummy row except copy above it You can paste the informa tion that is entire rows that you have copied from an open or closed row Selecting multiple rows are achieved by ho
72. down menu you can enter the letter or number that precedes a particular selection For instance if you want to jump from subfield z within the drop down menu to subfield a you can simply press the letter a Click OK to exit and save your work click Cancel or Esc to exit without saving Holdings 007 Fixed Field The 007 field is a non repeatable field that allows you to define a material category The Holdings 007 field displays as a grid which is completely configurable using Voyager s MARC tag tables See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for details on the MARC tag tables The procedure for configuring the holdings 007 fixed field is shown in Procedure 2 13 Configuring the Holdings 007 Fixed Field on page 2 39 Procedure 2 13 Configuring the Holdings 007 Fixed Field Use the following to configure the holdings 007 fixed field Click the 007 button see Figure 2 29 from the MARC tab of an open holdings record 007 Figure 2 29 007 Button Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 39 2 40 Result The 007 field displays a tabbed dialog box see Figure 2 30 007 Physical Description a Map Figure 2 30 007 Physical Description dialog box for holdings information Select a tab on which you want to enter values NOTE You can use keyboard shortcuts to access tabs without the use of the mouse by holding down the Alt key and
73. e Bib Title s tab e History tab The MARC tab of a holdings record contains a Leader an 008 fixed field and variable fields It also contains only one 007 fixed field All values correspond to the published MARC standard Voyager Cataloging ST eS File Edit Record Display Options Window Help s 4 Da ae A Qf Haw ee Search Headings Titles SavetoDB New Hidgs Get Hidas New Items Getltems Hierarchy Help New Open Save Hidg 29442 bib 28820 Literature of the South by Richmond Croom Beateyr MARC System Bib Title s History Leader JO0TS ax 20000673 4500 os pensen oo f oog 970115 0 p 8 4 001 au eng 0 000000 Tag 14 12 Gubtield Daia a ocm01396361 852 0 b main h PS261 i B43 20 PM_4 Figure 2 27 Holdings Record MARC Tab Once a holdings record is saved to the database see Saving a Record on page 4 5 the title of the associated bibliographic record is displayed on the title bar of the holdings record and on the BibTitle s tab Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 37 Holdings Leader The Holdings Leader field allows you to select the Record Status Type of Record and Encoding Level The Holdings Leader field displays as a grid which is completely configurable using Voyager s MARC tag tables See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for details on the MARC tag tables The proced
74. e Move this field down by one moves the focus row down by one row Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 4 12 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information NOTE While Validate Heading is only performed on a single row performing Cut Copy and Delete from the menu bar operates on all selected rows When a menu option does not apply it is not displayed Make a Copy of a Record You can make a copy of a record retrieved from the database by selecting Record gt Make a Copy The procedure for copying a record is shown in Procedure 4 7 Copy a Record on page 4 13 Procedure 4 7 Copy a Record Use the following to copy a record Display the record from the database that you want to copy See Search Dialog Box on page 3 28 for more information When the record is displayed select Record gt Make a Copy Result A copy of the record displays The 001 field is stripped out of the new copy You can save this as a new record in the database and the Date of Creation is updated in the 008 fixed field byte 00 through 05 NOTE Voyager checks for duplicate records according to the preference set in Session Defaults For more information see General Tab on page 10 2 You can also make a copy of records that do not come from the database by using the Save As command For more information see Save As on page 4 7 Printing a Record You can print a bibliog
75. for your server you can access and view the following files created during the import and delete functions in the Cataloging module You can FTP these files to the Cataloging client actually your PC using standard FTP procedures deleted bib marc deleted mfhd marc deleted auth marc discard bib marc discard auth marc NOTE The files produced when you import records through Voyager s Bulk Import batch job have the same names as the files listed above with the exception that marc in the filename is replaced by yyyymmdd hhmm For details on Bulk Import see the Voyager Technical User s Guide Creating New Bibliographic Records from Image Server If your library has installed Image Server you can create a new bibliographic record in Cataloging with a link to images You can specify certain bibliographic information Such as Name Title and so on on the File Documents folder and it will be transferred to a new bibliographic record in Cataloging Bibliographic information is mapped into appropriate MARC fields to images displaying in the 856 fields From the File Documents dialog box in Image Server Figure 3 21 you Can create a new bibliographic record that contains the specified bibliographic information as well as the image link by pressing function keys See Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Function Key Options for Creating Bibliographic Records Function Key Description F8 Creates an 856 tag s in a open bibli
76. from a text file Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 7 6 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Pick and Scan Pick And Scan Emise Figure 7 7 Barcode text box See Figure 7 7 and Figure 7 8 regarding the Barcode text box processing method and Figure 7 9 and Figure 7 10 regarding the Select File processing method Pick And Scan Figure 7 8 Check mark button Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 7 7 Select a text txt file 2i x Srs re mee l A ose Filc ol Barcodes 20010927 tu C p entiers l p Figure 7 9 Select File ellipsis Sii TIP Click the ellipsis button to access the directory of files See Figure 7 9 ick And Scan mine Bice Save toje Figure 7 10 Filename path entered Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 7 8 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Pick and Scan NOTE The file of barcodes created for batch processing must be a Windows not UNIX file delimited by carriage returns That is each barcode must be separated by carriage return See Figure 7 10 and Figure 7 11 fz item File_Delete txt Notepad File Edit Search Help 53794 53792 Figure 7 11 Carriage return delimited file OPTIONAL 6 Click Print List or Save to File txt file type to capture the Processing Report displayed as in Figure 7
77. in keyword Anywhere And Or Not Edit Delete Cancel Clear Limit Bemote Go to Google Figure 3 46 Builder tab Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 49 Table 3 8 describes the Builder tab Table 3 8 Builder tab Name Type Description Search for Text box Enter your search term s or phrases in the Search for field Unlabeled drop down menu allowing the operator to determine how to search Any of these places as implied or between the search terms All of these places as implied and between terms As a phrase searches as if the terms are placed in quotes Search In Drop down Contains a drop down menu of search types Boolean Buttons Use the And Or or Not buttons to conduct a bool ean search with additional search criteria Search terms Unlabeled box containing your search terms and if list box used accompanying Boolean operators Edit Button Allows you to edit any search term or phrase you select from the unlabeled search term box Delete Button Deletes any selected search term from the unla beled search term box Do Search Button Executes the search Cancel Button Cancels the search Clear Button Deletes the search term s in the Search for field Limit Button Opens the Search Limits dialog box NOTE The Limits button is not available for Heading searches See Search Li
78. in the Search by section of the Search dialog box Thus if you are searching a remote database and your local database simultaneously and the only attribute the two databases have in common is the author attribute you will only be able to perform a search by author Additional searching rules apply if you are searching other databases such as connecting to multiple databases disables heading searches Z39 50 databases do not support search limits For more information on simultaneous searching including setting up search attributes see the Voyager System Administration User s Guide After you enter your search criteria click the Do Search button or Alt S What displays next depends on whether or not you are searching multiple databases or a single database Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records NOTE If you receive an error message such as Malformed Query or Search Failed check your Database Definitions in System Administration module The Search Status dialog box opens if you are searching more than one database at once It displays the database name as defined in System Administration and the status of the search such as Searching Receiving or Done See Figure 3 19 The Stop Search button allows you to stop the search at any time if the status of the search is Searching or Receiving Search Status Dat
79. invalid records in the file are displayed in the Status bar of the Cataloging module Invalid records are not displayed in the dialog box listing records to import and cannot be imported For resolving problems with invalid records see Invalid Recordson 3 24 3 Highlight the record s you want to import The number of records you can import at one time depends on your machine s available memory Result The records are highlighted for import 4 Click OK to import the selected record s or click Cancel to close the dialog box without importing the selected record s Result An imported record is displayed with a new 035 field which contains the old 003 followed by the 001 5 Save the records as work files or save them to the database Result Duplication checking occurs when a record is saved to the database For more information see Save to Database on page 4 7 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 14 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Importing Records From Another Database In addition to importing records from a new or previously used file it is also possible to import records from another database You can import records from a remote database directly from the Search dialog box as well as perform a simultaneous search of many databases at once In order to search for and import records from other databases you must define the databases
80. is See Creating and Opening Records on page 3 1 for more information Link Item to Bib The procedure for linking items to bibliographic records is shown in Linking Items to Bibliographic Records on page 3 80 The procedure for linking items to bibliographic records is shown in Procedure 3 18 Linking Items to Bibliographic Records on page 3 80 Procedure 3 18 Linking Items to Bibliographic Records Use the following to link items to bibliographic records 1 Select Record gt Link to bibliographic Result The Link the item to a bibliographic record dialog box opens Figure 3 76 Link the item to a bibliographic record Enter the bib id Cancel Figure 3 76 Link the item to a bibliographic record dialog box 2 Type the appropriate bibliographic ID in the text box The bibliographic ID is displayed in the title bar of the bibliographic record 3 Click OK to link the item record to the bibliographic record click Cancel to close the Link an item to bibliographic record dialog box without linking the records Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 80 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records NOTE The ability to link bibliographic and item records in the Record menu is disabled if the system focus is not on a bibliographic or item record from the database It also doesn t work if the focus is on a bibliographic record from the database b
81. is required and nonrepeatable The Holdings 008 field displays as a grid which is completely configurable using Voyager s MARC tag tables See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for details on the MARC tag tables The procedure for configuring the holdings 008 fixed field is shown in Procedure 2 14 Configuring the Holdings 008 Fixed Field on page 2 42 Procedure 2 14 Configuring the Holdings 008 Fixed Field 2 42 Use the following to configure the holdings 008 fixed field Click the 008 button see Figure 2 32 from the MARC tab of an open holdings record 008 Figure 2 32 008 Button Result The 008 dialog box see Figure 2 33 opens in a grid format Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating 008 General Description Holding JEO UNKNOWN soanen E p Purchase 8 Permanently retained Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Figure 2 33 008 General Description Holding dialog box 2 Inthe Cancellation Date Number of Copies and Date of Report fields enter values if applicable 3 Select other values from the grid by clicking a particular cell and then the down arrow to display drop down menu selections You must use either the mouse or the up and down arrows on your keyboard to move from
82. on the Validation tab in Session Defaults and Preferences in the Cataloging module see Validation Tab Figure 10 2 on page 10 4 for more information to translate single entity non Roman characters into two components so that there is an alphacharacter and diacritic for MARC21 compliance Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode C 3 Considerations for Records Imported or Converted to Unicode For existing Voyager systems records in the database need to be converted to the Unicode UTF 8 encoding for the Voyager with Unicode release This process is separate and distinct from importing non Unicode records into an existing Voyager with Unicode database See Database Conversion on page C 4 and Bulklmport on page C 8 for a description of the conversion and import processes and considerations See the Voyager Technical User s Guide for information about exporting records from a Voyager with Unicode database Database Conversion When a non Unicode Voyager database is converted to a Voyager with Unicode database the following record processing occurs Each record is analyzed to determine if it is a Unicode encoded record The system checks the ninth position of the Leader See Characteristics of a Unicode Formatted Record in Voyager on page C 2 Non Unicode records are converted to the Unicode UTF 8 encoding format Any non recognizable characters are replaced
83. page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode C 7 BulkImport When importing records using Bulklmport the following record processing occurs The system checks the Bulk Import Rule defined in the Voyager System Administration module to determine the character set mapping of the incoming records If MARC21 UTF 8 the only Unicode encoding option is selected the system expects the letter a to be stored in position 9 of the Leader See Characteristics of a Unicode Formatted Record in Voyager on page C 2 for more information All the other options are non Unicode and the system expects a space to be stored in position 9 of the Leader Position 9 of the Leader is analyzed to determine if it matches the Bulk Import Rule specified in Voyager System Administration If the Leader position does not contain the expected value the record is not imported and an error is logged in the standard Bulklmport message logs For a summary of Bulklmport processing and results see Table C 5 After a record passes the check on the 9th position of the Leader the system converts the remaining fields according to the mapping information provided in the Bulk Import Rule If the record contains characters that cannot be converted an error is logged in the standard Bulklmport message logs and the record is not imported Table C 5 BulkImport Rules Results Mapping Leader Expected Character Set of Pos
84. record s error such as in the file or manually key the record into the Cataloging module RECOMMENDED If you attempt to fix the error in the file we recommend that you re export the record from your utility and then try the import again Alternatively provided you can associate the import record file with an appropriate application such as Notepad you can display the record outside of Voyager diagnose the problem most likely there are missing field tags subfield delimiters end of field marks and so on make the necessary corrections and then import the record However unless you are very familiar with MARC and have the available time it is unlikely that this will be your preferred method Keying the record into Voyager is generally the easiest and quickest solution for dealing with invalid records ie TIP When it comes to invalid records you should follow your utility s procedures for reporting problems Accessing Replaced or Deleted Files 3 24 In order to access deleted and discarded files you must have permission to access the server Every MARC record imported into Voyager that is either overlaid or deleted gets written to a deleted file every incoming MARC record that is not added such as a duplicate or canceled is put into a discard file Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Using standard commands
85. s War 1702 1713 Gettysburg Pa Battle of 1863 Figure 3 39 Scope Notes for a heading Narrower Term Find a narrower term by selecting it and clicking the Do Search button see Figure 3 40 Reference Information Narrower Term Jihad Narrower Term Militarism See Also Military art and science Narrower Term Military policy Narrower Term Naval art and science Narrower Term Nuclear warfare See Also Peace Narrower Term Revolutions caresi Figure 3 40 Narrower term The system does a new search for the narrower term see Figure 3 41 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 45 3 46 Headings List Bibs OPAC Subject Headings Search Heading Heading Type 12 Nuclear warfare LC subject headings Reference 1 Nuclear Warfare congresses 1 Nuclear warfare Environmental aspects 1 Nuclear warfare Environmental aspects Congresses 2 Nuclear warfare Fiction 2 Nuclear warfare Fiction 2 Nuclear warfare Moral and ethical aspects 1 Nuclear warfare Psychological aspects 1 Nuclear warfare Religious aspects Wheeden cae Cancel Search Authority Search OPAC Subject Headings Search Nuclear warfare 12 Headings Found ee Oe a Pe E Medical subject headings LC subject headings LC subject headings LC subject headings LC subject headings for children LC subject headings LC subject headings LC subject headings
86. same name Select File gt Save As to save the template with a different name If you use Save As the suffix for the file must be tem NOTE When a template is saved it is not validated against authority records or the MARC tag table The procedure for deleting a template is shown in Procedure 8 3 Deleting a Template on page 8 3 Procedure 8 3 Deleting a Template Use the following to delete a template Select File gt Template gt Edit Select the template you want to delete and click Open Result The template you selected displays Select File gt Template gt Delete Voyager will ask you if you really want to delete the selected template Click OK to delete the selected template or click Cancel to close the dialog box without deleting the selected template Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 8 3 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 8 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode RET Authority Control Contents Introduction 9 1 Columns on the Authority Validation Dialog Box 9 2 Buttons on the Authority Validation Dialog Box 9 4 Global Headings Change and Preview Queue 9 5 e Sample Global Headings Change Work Flow 9 8 Global Change Process 9 9 Splitting a Heading 9 13 Heading Merge 9 14 Name Title Heading Change 9 14 Buttons 9 14 Global Headings Batch Job 9 15 Endeavor Information Systems Inc
87. the Validation tab in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences DOS Links DOS network files are determined by the operating system specified in the MARC record 856 field Table of Contents To display a formatted Table of Contents in the OPAC you must define the 505 field in the bibliographic record The OPAC displays the information stored in subfield ta and formats the information in one line that wraps to fit each screen and starts a new line at each double dash System Tab Press Alt S from an open bibligraphic record to switch to the System tab The System tab contains the options to approve records for export and to suppress records from OPAC In addition the Owning Library for the record displays See Figure 2 18 All the information relating to OK to export is located on the System tab including whether or not the record is OK to be exported YES NO the date on which the OK to export option should take effect the date on which the OK to export option was last set the operator who set the record as OK to export and the location at which OK to export was set Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 24 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating 7 Bib 654 Charles Burchfield Figure 2 18 Bibliographic Record System Tab OK to Export Option The OK to export option is used by libraries that export records For instance you may export recor
88. the field for a particular label in the dialog box onscreen simply enter nothing after the stanza name If nothing is entered in a particular Print Template Spine XXX or Print Template Piec XXX stanza nothing displays for that label or piece onscreen However you may still enter anything into the label or piece field in the Print Labels dialog box and print that information Action codes are used in these stanzas to change how the information displays on the label and field codes are used after the F action code to specify the information that is to be printed The information you enter in the Print Template Spine XXX and Print Template Piece XXX stanzas prints with the font and font size specified in the StandardFont and StandardFontSize variables inthe Print Options XXX stanza for that type of record unless you specify otherwise See Printing in the Alternate Font and Changing Font Size For example if you want the caption Item Barcode to print simply enter Item Barcode Action Codes Table 4 5 contains a list of action codes that you can use to change how the information displays on the labels Table 4 5 Action codes descriptions Action Codes Description prints a blank line A starts alternate font Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 19 4 20 Table 4 5 Action codes descriptions
89. to the appropriate template If you select a template from the Select Holdings Template dialog box that is not a holdings record template you get the following error message see Figure 3 5 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 5 Voyager Cataloging Figure 3 5 Error message for selecting an inappropriate template FG Figure 3 6 Create Holdings Button NOTE If the bibliographic record contains more than one instance of the field that contains the call number the last one listed in the bibliographic record is used in the new holdings record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 6 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Select or add holdings records Main 0141 J Figure 3 7 Dialog box for creating a Holdings record from an open Bibliographic record when one already exists 2 Complete the appropriate fields in the record and click Save Result A New Holdings Record is saved to the database NOTE If the active bibliographic record already has a holdings record associated with it Voyager opens a dialog box that warns you of the existing holdings record Figure 3 7 This dialog box only opens if you have not selected Always create a holding when adding holdings to a bib on the Workflow tab in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preference
90. to which you want to connect This is done in the Database Definitions portion of the System Administration module See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details The procedure for importing records from another database is shown in Procedure 3 6 Importing Records From Another Database on page 3 15 Procedure 3 6 Importing Records From Another Database Use the following to import records from another database 1 Click the Search button from the Cataloging toolbar or select Record gt Search Result The Search dialog box opens Figure 3 14 Staff Subject Headings Search AGROVOC multilingual agricultural thesaurus AGROVOC tesauro agricola multilingue AGROVOC thesaurus agricole multilingue APAIS Australian Public Affairs Info Service Aquatic sciences and fisheries thesaurus Figure 3 14 Search dialog box Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 15 3 16 2 Click the Remote button at the bottom right of the Search dialog box or press Alt R This displays the Voyager Connection Options dialog box Figure 3 15 From this dialog box you can choose the database s to which you want to connect simultaneously search and import records IMPORTANT For the Remote button to display on the Search dialog box you must establish and define the databases you want to search and import records from in Voyager s System A
91. using characters as place markers Use these place markers as reminders to complete those subfields using a particular format Example 260 a tb c yyyy Tags with derivation fields See the examples beginning with Table 5 5 Combinations of all of the above Example 300 nn ta p tb ill c cm Example 650 nn a Geography lt z 650z gt lt ty 650y gt Example 100 nn fa Syria Derrell te lyricist lt fa 505r gt To illustrate the functionality of templates consider this template created to link bibliographic records for individual songs to the bibliographic record for the CD recording Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 5 16 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking Table 5 13 Example of a template using standard and derivation fields Tag Subfield Data 028 lt a 028a gt 035 lt a 035a gt 090 lt ta 090a gt lt tb 090b gt 100 lt a 700a gt lt d 700d gt 245 lt a 505a gt lt fa 505t gt lt th 245h gt 260 lt a 260c gt lt tb 260b gt lt tc 260c gt 300 lt a 300a gt lt tb 300b gt lt tc 300c gt 500 t lt ta 500a gt 505 ta Concertos for Harp and Orchestra 505 lt a 505a gt 508 ta t lt 508a gt 650 lt a 650a gt lt z 650z gt lt ty 650y gt 700 lt ta 700a gt 773 lt a
92. well as dynamically mapped subfield data from the existing source record You can also map subfields from one type of MARC record to a different type of MARC record This functionality can be used with Bibliographic Record Linking or it can be used independently Derivation fields provide the link when you create related records in Cataloging These fields specify the tag and subfield data in the active source MARC record that is mapped into a new MARC record The derivation fields also determine the subfield in the new record to which the data is mapped You can add derivation fields to an existing template or create new templates Templates containing derivation fields are created and maintained in the same manner as standard templates There are two basic formats for a derivation field See Figure 5 7 Line 1 t lt 022a gt 2 lt tx 022a gt Figure 5 7 Examples of derivation fields See Table 5 2 and Table 5 3 for a description of the elements contained in the examples in Figure 5 7 Table 5 2 Description of the first example in line 1 of Figure 5 7 Component Description t delimiter symbol hex 1f lt left opening angle bracket 022 tag in source record a subfield in source record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 9 Table 5 2 Description of the first example in line 1 of Figure 5 7 Component Descriptio
93. with a Unicode substitution character Records that cannot be converted to Unicode are viewable in the Cataloging module with ne not coverted displayed in the Title Bar See Non Converted Records nc on page C 4 for more information Also if appropriate options have been selected in Session Defaults and Preferences non converted records display in a different color See Colors Fonts Tab Figure 10 8 on page 10 16 for more information Log files are generated as part of the conversion process See Message Logs on page C 5 for more information These log files can be used to diagnose records that do not convert successfully to Unicode UTF 8 encoding Non Converted Records nc A non converted record can be viewed and corrected in the Cataloging module and subsequently saved as a Unicode record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page C 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Voyager with Unicode Considerations Ay IMPORTANT Message Logs For a record to display in the Cataloging module there must be an a in the 9th position of the Leader Therefore you see both nc in the Title Bar and an a in the 9th position of the Leader This may seem like a contradiction However the letter a in the 9th position of the Leader does not become a permanent component of the record until the record is saved to the database CAUTION Be certain to make all corrections to the ne record before saving it to
94. x 1234 5678 2234 5678 3334 5678 5 14 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking Table 5 10 Example 6 Derivation field Rule If the format of the derivation field is lt tc c gt and a subfield is repeated in the active bibliographic record map each occur rence of the subfield into the new record in the order in which they appear NOTE This format adds one new tag followed by the subfield data separated by the subfield specified in the derivation field If the active source record contains 022 nn a 1234 5678 022 nn ta 2234 5678 022 nn fa 3334 5678 And the cataloging template contains 773 nn lt x 022a gt Then the new record contains 773 nn x 1234 5678 tx 2234 5678 x 3334 5678 Table 5 11 Example 7 Derivation field Rule If the derivation field has the format lt VRID gt or lt c VRID gt map the Voyager record ID from the active record into the new record If the active source record contains 001 60349 And the cataloging template contains 773 nn x lt VRID gt or 773 nn lt x VRID gt Then the new record contains 773 nn x 60349 Table 5 12 Example 9 Derivation field Rule In all cases if the format of the derivation field is not valid output it to the destination record as is
95. you have not retrieved Only when you have retrieved all of the records does the count reflect the real total in the queue The following Table 9 7 describes the different button options Table 9 7 Button Descriptions Button Description Process Highlight the new heading by clicking it and click the Pro cess button to flag the row to save changes to the data base in a batch job Clear Highlight the heading by clicking it and then click the Clear button to prevent the batch program from process ing the heading such as remove the Process flag Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Authority Control Table 9 7 Button Descriptions Button Description Search Performs a browse search on the original heading or old heading Saving a record to the database allows you to search it NOTE If the heading selected is a subdivision the search performed is a regular find search rather than a browse Preview Display any heading change by selecting it and clicking Preview Auth Displays the authority record Delete Deletes the selected changes from the Global Headings Change Queue When bib records are displayed after clicking the Preview button the following buttons see Table 9 8 display with the bib records in the lower portion of the dialog box Table 9 8 Button Description for
96. 103 Table 4 7 contains the list of Bibliographic Field Codes 200 Series field codes A detailed definition of the data retrieved for the 200 Series field codes can be found in the Voyager System Administration User s Guide Table 4 7 Bibliographic Field Codes 200 Series Data Displayed Code Bib_lId 200 Title_Brief 201 Title see also Title long 202 Author 203 Imprint 204 Table 4 8 contains the list of Holdings Field Codes 300 Series field codes The 300 Series field codes pull the content to print from the MFHD WebVoyage display format as defined by the institution Table 4 8 Holdings Field Codes 300 Series Data Displayed Code Mfhd_ld 300 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 4 22 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information Table 4 8 Holdings Field Codes 300 Series Data Displayed Code Call Number Display Format 301 Table 4 9 contains the list of Item Field Codes 400 Series field codes The 400 Series field codes use the data stored in the item record for printing the spine label Table 4 9 Item Field Codes 400 Series Data Displayed Code Item_lId 400 Item Barcode 401 Enumeration 402 Chronology 403 Year 404 Caption 405 Free Text 406 Copy Number 407 Item Type Code 411 Item Type Name 412 Item Type Display 4
97. 13 Item Location Code prints the tem 414 porary location if there is one other wise prints the permanent location Item Location Name 415 Item Location Display Name 416 Item Location Spine Label 417 Pieces 418 Price 419 Spine Label 420 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 23 Table 4 10 contains the list of Library Address Field Codes 500 Series field codes The data for the 500 Series field codes is defined through the Voyager System Administration client application Table 4 10 Library Address Field Codes 500 Series Data Displayed Code Address Line 1 510 Address Line 2 511 Address Line 3 512 Address Line 4 513 Address Line 5 514 City 515 State Province 516 Zip Postal Code 517 Country 518 Table 4 11 on page 24 contains the list of Received Serial Issue 600 Series field codes The data for the 600 Series field codes is defined through the serials retrieval process See the Voyager Acquisitions User s Guide for more information Table 4 11 Received Serial Issue Field Codes 600 Series Data Displayed Code Component Name 600 Enum Chron 601 Receipt Date 602 Sample Template File Figure 4 9 is a sample label print template file Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 4 24 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode
98. 22 Sa a P Help Search Headings Titles SavetoDB Mew Hidgs Get Hidgs New tems Get Items Hierarchy Encoding Level Suppress Ach ction CREATE 3 Holdingslevel3 N Tag i 12 Subtied Daia oi4 faocm0 1396354 662 0 tb main th PS261 ti B43 TAM 4 Figure 2 41 Holdings Record History Tab Sorting the columns You can sort each of the History tab columns in ascending or descending order by clicking the column header Lag Time In cases where a record has undergone massive amounts of changes such as 1000 you may find a small lag time when you click the History tab or select Alt Y This is because the History tab is dynamically updated by your Voyager system each time you click it The lag time should not be more than a few seconds Viewing and Editing Line Items from Holdings Records It is possible to view and then manipulate a line item in the Acquisitions module from the associated bibliographic or holdings record in the Cataloging module This feature is known as Acquisitions in Cataloging or Acq in the Cat Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 55 Acq in the Cat is the second half of the two way communication between the Acquisitions and Cataloging modules See the Viewing and Editing MARC Records section of the Voyager Acquisitions User s Guide for details Cat in the Acq allows you to view and then edit a M
99. 3 53 Display Bibliographic Record Directly If Search Results In Only One Title 3 30 for an item by headings non keyword 3 36 3 47 for an item by keyword 3 34 for item keyword search 3 34 headings searches by call number 3 40 keyword 3 30 limits 3 53 3 54 relevance 3 31 remote 3 29 retain last search 3 30 unable to limit 3 55 URI option 3 29 3 32 3 38 3 50 without relevance 3 31 Security logging in 1 4 see also 3 46 Select Bibliographic Template dialog box 5 21 5 22 5 27 Select Directory dialog box 5 24 Selected Locations section Voyager Connection Options dialog box 3 61 Session Defaults and Preferences Cataloging module 5 18 5 25 Folders Files tab 5 18 5 25 Cataloging Options 10 1 Colors Fonts tab 10 16 dialog box 5 18 5 19 5 23 Folders Files tab 10 12 General tab 10 2 Item Defaults tab 10 10 Mapping tab 10 14 Validation tab 10 4 Work Flow tab 10 8 setting search limits 3 56 Show Results button 3 65 Simultaneous Search dialog box 3 63 sorting History tab authority 2 36 bibliographic 2 27 holdings 2 55 source record Related Record 5 2 Special Character Entry 6 1 Special Character Mode 6 3 Special Character Mode mapping 6 3 Special Characters cfg 6 7 Spine Label Print Template 4 17 Spine labels 4 14 spinelabel cfg 4 17 stanza Print Options 4 17 Print Options Bibliographic 4 17 Print Template Piece 4 18 Print Template Piece Bibliographic 4 17
100. 3 80 Relink an Item to a Different Holdings 3 81 Unlinking Holdings and Bib Records 3 82 Copying an Item Record from an Existing Item Record 3 83 l EES aT 4 Changing Saving and Printing Information e Changing Information 4 1 Editing a Record 4 1 Deleting a Record 4 2 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page vi February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Contents Adding a URL to an 856 Field 4 3 Change Owning Library 4 4 e Saving and Printing Information 4 5 Saving a Record 4 5 Save 4 5 Update Record Alert 4 6 Save As 4 7 Save to Database 4 7 Saving to the Database and to a File Simultaneously 4 10 Validating a Bib Heading 4 11 Make a Copy of a Record 4 13 Printing a Record 4 13 Printing Labels 4 14 Bibliographic Records 4 16 Holdings Records 4 16 Item Records 4 16 Spine and Piece Label Print Template 4 17 Closing a Record 4 30 5 Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking e Introduction 5 1 Displaying Related Records 5 1 Templates 5 5 e MARC Record Derivation Using Cataloging Templates 5 8 Multiple Subfields 5 12 Non Matching Subfields 5 12 Rules and Examples for Derivation Fields 5 12 Template Example 5 16 e Session Defaults and Preferences 5 18 Folders Files Tab 5 18 6 Diacritics and Non Roman Characters e Introduction 6 1 e Special Character Entry 6 1 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode vii Cont
101. 5 A MARC Tag Tables e Introduction A 1 Tag Tables and MARC Validation A 4 Structure of MARC Tag Tables Overview A 5 Stanzas in the MARC Tag Tables A 6 e Xmarcfix cfg Tag Tables A 9 Sample Xmarcfix cfg Tag Table A 10 Grid Templates A 10 Defining Your Own Keyboard Shortcuts A 12 Stanzas in the Xmarcfix cfg Tag Tables A 13 Code Type Tab Stanzas 00xCode A 14 Template Stanzas 00x_ A 18 Drop Down Menu Selections Stanzas xxx A 22 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode ix Contents B Voyager Call Number Logic Processing B 1 e Call Number Indexing B 1 e Call Number Sorting and Searching B 3 Call Number Input Normalization Process Records Saved B 3 Call Number Searching and Display Results B 4 N C Voyager with Unicode Considerations C 1 e Voyager with Unicode Overview C 1 e Function Enhanced in Cataloging for Font Options and Input of Non Roman TextC 1 Characteristics of a Unicode Formatted Record in Voyager C 2 e Diacritics and MARC21 Compliance Considerations C 3 MARC21 Compliance Considerations C 3 e Considerations for Records Imported or Converted to Unicode C 4 Database Conversion C 4 Non Converted Records nc C 4 Message Logs C 5 Bulklmport C 8 e Subfield Character C 9 e Cataloging Templates C 9 e Analyzing Inconsistencies C 9 Hexadecimal Value C 10 e Resources C 10 n IN Index IN 1 Endeavor Information
102. 5 MARC Record Derivation Using Cataloging Templates 5 8 e Multiple Subfields 5 12 e Non Matching Subfields 5 12 e Rules and Examples for Derivation Fields 5 12 Template Example 5 16 Session Defaults and Preferences 5 18 e Folders Files Tab 5 18 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 i Contents Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 5 ii February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking Introduction Once you have added at least one bibliographic record linking profile in System Administration you can search for review and edit related records in the Cataloging module Configuration information for bibliographic record linking is located in the Voyager System Administration User s Guide in the chapter discussing search configuration and in the WebVoyage User s Guide in the Appendix describing WebVoyage configuration for bibliographic record linking For more information about searching for records in the Cataloging module see Search Dialog Box on page 3 28 For more information about editing or deleting records in the Cataloging module see Changing Information on page 4 1 Displaying Related Records Related Records displays on the menu bar whenever a linked source record is the active record in Cataloging Clicking Related Records displays one or more bibliographic linking profiles
103. 59448 040 ta DLO te DLO td DLO 100 1 0 ta Shakespear Wiliam td 1664 1616 Conoanus 400 1 0 ta Shakespeare Wiliam td 1564 4616 4 Works of Willam Shakespeare 1665 670 ta His Works of Wiliam Shakespeare 1865 tb contains Coriolanus and one other work Figure 2 26 Authority Record History Tab Sorting the columns You can sort each of the History tab columns in ascending or descending order by clicking the column header Lag Time In cases where a record has undergone massive amounts of changes such as 1000 you may find a small lag time when you click the History tab or select Alt Y This is because the History tab is dynamically updated by your Voyager system each time you click it The lag time should not be more than a few seconds Holdings Records Holdings Records MFHDs contain all the holdings information for bibliographic records A holdings record can be created by selecting Record gt Create Holdings or by clicking the Create Holdings button when a bibliographic record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 36 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating is the active record Before you can save a holdings record to the database you must define field 852 subfield b with a valid location code as defined in System Administration MARC Tab The Holdings Record window see Figure 2 27 consists of four tabs e MARC tab e System tab
104. 69 Voyager Cataloging Figure 3 69 Message associated line items do not exist Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records 4 Save your changes or exit when you are finished viewing the item in Acquisitions Retrieving Records Associated with Other Records You can retrieve records that are related to other records Depending on what type of record is the active record you can retrieve records by selecting the appropriate command from the Record menu See Table 3 12 You can also retrieve records by clicking the appropriate toolbar button Table 3 12 Retrieve Options Using Record Menu Record Type Able to Retrieve Authority None Bibliographic Authority Holdings or Item Holdings Items Items Holdings You can also view all of the associated records by selecting Record gt Show Associated Records or click the Hierarchy button From the Holdings and Items for dialog box you can select which associated record you want to retrieve e The procedure for retrieving holdings is shown in Procedure 3 15 Retrieve Holdings on page 3 75 e The procedure for retrieving authorities is shown in Procedure 3 16 Retrieve Authority on page 3 77 e The procedure for retrieving items is shown in Procedure 3 17 Retrieve Items on page 3 77 The procedure for retrieving
105. 7 Sample Bmarcfix cfg file stanza from the new MARC tag tables A 10 A 8 Sample 006_Books stanza in a Bmarcfix cfg file A 11 A 9 Grid for the 006 field of a bibliographic record A 12 A 10 Sample keyboard shortcut for the Books tab A 13 A 11 Code types tabs that display in the Cataloging module for a bibliographic record A 14 A 12 Code type examples from the 006Code stanza of a Bmarcfix cfg file for MARC21 format A 16 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xvii Figures A 13 The result in the Cataloging module of the 006Code stanza in the Bmarcfix cfg file A 17 A 14 Arrangement of tabs A 17 A 15 Sample template configuration stanza from a Bmarcfix cfg file A 19 A 16 Using Text Mask Characters in 008 Books Stanza A 21 A 17 Result in Cataloging module of the sample template configuration stanza A 22 A 18 Sample stanza defining drop down menu options for the 006 and 008 fields A 22 A 19 Result in the Cataloging module of the sample drop down menu stanza A 23 C Voyager with Unicode Considerations C 1 Leader Ninth Position C 2 drop down menu stanza A 22 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page xviii February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Tables EEE 2 Record Types and Creating 2 1 Description of Record Types 2 1 2 2 Link Status 2 23 2 3 Link Type 2 24 2 4 History Tab Field Descriptions 2 26 2 5 History Tab Field D
106. 8 Menu bar in the Cataloging module Result The Session Defaults and Preferences dialog box opens See Figure 5 9 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 19 Session Defaults and Preferences Cataloging Desk OCLCConditional Figure 5 9 Session Defaults and Preferences dialog box 3 Click the Folders Files tab Result The dialog box displays the Folders and Files options See Figure 5 10 Session Defaults and Preferences Figure 5 10 Folders Files tab for Session Defaults and Preferences Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 5 20 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking 4 Enter the entire path to the desired template for the appropriate record type bibliographic authority or holdings in the Templates section For example c voyager catalog template bib tem You can also click the ellipsis button Result The Select Bibliographic Template dialog box opens If you have not defined a Template folder on the Folders Files tab see Procedure 5 5 Defining a Default Folder on page 5 23 the dialog box defaults to the Voyager directory Look in E Voyager 7 E gal c Access Reports Catalog Circulation Misc Opac Reporter File name Open Files of type Template tem Cancel I Open as r
107. A New Item Record is saved to the database Opening a Record This section describes opening a record from a work folder and from the OPAC From a Work Folder Voyager Cataloging allows you to create edit and save records in work folders as well as in the database Records that are saved in work folders are called work records These records operate in the same way as other records except they are Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 8 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records not validated against the MARC tag tables or authority records until the records are saved to the database The Open Record from Work Folder button is shown in Figure 3 9 Figure 3 9 Open Record from Work Folder Button Si TIP If you are copying records between internal databases it is recommended that you use the import function instead of saving records to work folders and opening them in the new database This is because work records keep the 001 field and no duplication checking occurs between a work record and the database The procedure for opening a work record is shown in Procedure 3 4 Opening a Work Record on page 3 9 Procedure 3 4 Opening a Work Record 1 Use the following to open a work record Select File gt Work Record gt Open Result The Select Work File dialog box opens You can specify a folder to which this dialog box defaults in Cat
108. ARC record in the Cataloging module from the associated line item in the Acquisitions module For details and instructions on using the Acq in the Cat feature see Viewing and Editing Line Items Acquisitions in Cataloging on page 3 68 Item Records 2 56 An Item Record see Figure 2 42 describes a single item owned by your institution An item record can be created by selecting Record gt Create Items or by clicking the Create Items button when a bibliographic or holdings record is the active record Item 56 for holdings 10 olx Title Measuring recreation supply Winston Harrington Location Main Collection Call GY191 6 H37 1987 Barcode fat 714000176023 Temp Loc X Perm Loc Main Collection h Temp Type x Item Type Monograph i Media Type x Enum Chron Year Caption Free text Spine Ex Copy fo Pieces 7 Price 0 00 Figure 2 42 Example of an Item Record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Checking for Duplicate Barcodes Any time an item barcode is being created or edited Voyager tests for the existence of duplicate barcodes in the database When the barcode you are attempting to attach to an item is already in use elsewhere you will be advised of this fact with a dialog box and asked if the barcode should be used anyway You may ena
109. DATE CRE ATE MERGE REPLACE or RELINK Encoding Level The encoding level as set in the Leader field of the record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 26 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Table 2 4 History Tab Field Descriptions Field Name Description Suppress Action Whether or not the Suppress from OPAC check box was checked on the System tab Bib 654 Charles Burchfield level material not examined Figure 2 19 Bibliographic Record History Tab Sorting the columns You can sort the History tab columns in ascending or descending order by clicking the column header Lag Time In cases where a record has undergone massive amounts of changes such as 1000 updates you may find a small lag time when you click the History tab or select Alt Y This is because the History tab is dynamically updated by your Voyager system The lag time should not be more than a few seconds Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 27 Viewing and Editing Line Items from Bibliographic Records It is possible to view and then manipulate a line item in the Acquisitions module from the associated bibliographic or holdings record in the Cataloging module This feature is known as Acquisitions in Cataloging or Acq in the Cat Acq in the Cat is th
110. IV Display all the headings 856 link servers URN V Name Dolt i Title r Heading Types IV Name Title IV Subject Image Server JV Subdivision Cancel Figure 10 2 Session Defaults Validation tab Table 10 2 Validation tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Cataloging formats Select one of the Cataloging formats e Marc21 e Oclc e Riin See Tag Tables and MARC Validation on page A 4 for more information Bypass MARC Validation Select this option to stop the validation of records against the MARC tag tables when you save to the database More information regarding tag tables is available in MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 See Figure 10 3 for an example of the message window that displays when this option is not selected and invalid characters are found when attempting to store a record in the database Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 5 Table 10 2 Validation tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Bypass MARC21 Character set validation Select this option to prevent the validation of records against the MARC21 character set when you save to the database When this option is not selected the MARC21 Repertoire cfg file stored in the Catalog folder of the Voyager software on each PC is used for character s
111. If you click No the call number is not replaced Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Voyager Cataloging Figure 2 38 Message for replacing an existing call number with a new one from a different classification scheme System Tab Pressing Alt S from an open holdings record will switch you to the System tab The System tab contains the options to approve records for export and to suppress records from OPAC In addition the Owning Library for the record displays See Figure 2 39 All the information relating to OK to export is located on the System tab including whether or not the record is OK to be exported YES NO the date on which the OK to export option should take effect the date on which the OK to export option was last set the operator who set the record as OK to export and the location at which OK to export was set Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 51 Hidg 34791 bib 34169 Time and its use a self management guide for teache P E3 MARC System Bib Titlefs History from OPAC Owning Library Training Master DB vs 9 24 2003 Change to Today Last set for 372472003 By demo At Cataloging Desk Tag 11 12 Subfield Data O14 1 ta ocm10780567 862 0 tb main th LB2838 ti
112. Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 1 e Item entries from an active Holdings record See Procedure 3 3 Creating an Item Record from an Active Holdings Record on page 3 8 The procedure for creating a new record is shown in Procedure 3 1 Creating a New Record on page 3 2 Procedure 3 1 Creating a New Record Use the following to create a new record 1 Select from the toolbar Record gt New gt Authority or Record gt New gt Bibliographic Or click the arrow next to the Create a new record from a template button and select Authority or Bibliographic See Figure 3 1 Figure 3 1 New Record Button NOTE You can only choose between creating a new Authority or Bibliographic record here because Holdings records can only be created when a Bibliographic record is the active record and Item records can only be created when a Holdings record is the active record Result The Select Bibliographic Template dialog box opens see Figure 3 2 if you have not specified a particular template in your Session Defaults and Preferences Session Defaults and Preferences allows you to specify a file path for the Authority Bibliographic templates Your result may differ depending on what Session Defaults and Preferences have been set Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 2 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Rec
113. Information Systems Incorporated gEndeavor Voyager with Unicode Cataloging User s Guide Endeavor Information Systems Inc This document contains proprietary information of Endeavor Information Systems Inc and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements Copyright 2004 Endeavor Information Systems Inc Unpublished and Not for Publication All Rights Reserved Copyright 2004 Endeavor Information Systems Inc This material is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries It may not be reproduced distributed or altered in any fashion by any entity either internal or external to Endeavor Information Systems except in accordance with applicable agreements contracts or licensing Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Trademarks Voyager is a registered trademark of Endeavor Information Systems Inc WebVoyage is trademark of Endeavor Information Systems Inc UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Ltd Microsoft the Microsoft logo MS MS DOS Microsoft PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C Win32 Microsoft Windows the Windows logo Microsoft Notepad Microsoft Windows Explorer Microsoft Internet Explorer and Windows NT are registered tradema
114. Location in System Administration Address Bib ID Item ID Copy Number and Item Barcode Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 4 16 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information Spine and Piece Label Print Template The spine and piece label print template allows you to customize the appearances of spine and piece labels from bibliographic holdings item and serial records You can also create a template for a label with solely general information You can define what kind of information displays on each label You can customize its layout and appearance and you can specify the number of copies that are to be printed This information is contained in a file called spinelabel cfg which is located in the Misc directory on the client workstation For each type of information that can be printed there are three stanzas in the template e Print Options XXX stanza e Print Template Spine XXX stanza e Print Template Piece XXX stanza XXX represents the type of record or the specific names of the stanzas For example the bibliographic record stanzas are called Print Options Bibliographic Print Template Spine Bibliographic and Print Template Piece Bibliographic NOTE These names cannot be changed Altering the names causes label printing to fail The Print Options XXX stanza contains the formatting and general information regar
115. MARC System History Leader o0862cam 2200241 i 4500 006 005 joor 0809165146 0 008 010809 b Tag 11 12 Subfield Data 210 0 fa Soc Cin 245 0 O fa Journal of the Society of Cinematologists Figure 5 2 Preceding title for Cinema Journal and applicable profiles Figure 5 2 shows the result of selecting the 780Preceding profile from the Related Records menu It also shows the profiles which apply to the preceding title Journal of the Society of Cinematologists The Related Records menu lists both the 780Preceding and 785Succeeding profiles Selecting the 785Succeeding profile would re display the MARC record for Cinema Journal The Related Records menu for both Cinema Journal and Journal of the Society of Cinematologists lists a profile name Child Records Selecting that profile would result in an error message Voyager Cataloging i No related records found for the selected profile Figure 5 3 No related records message Neither title is related to any child records at this point However both records contain an 035 a which are the tag subfield overrides for that profile Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 5 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking If the system finds only one related record it displays the record This depends on whether or not the Display bibliographic record directly if search r
116. Map tab See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for details on how to define your own keyboard access keys Click the New button Result A grid displays with various options see Figure 2 10 Select options from the grid by clicking a particular cell and the down arrow to display drop down menu selections Result You can enter the 007 field information to match your material NOTE Use either the mouse or the up down arrow keys on your keyboard to move from cell to cell within the grid or from option to option in the drop down lists The Tab Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating key is not available for use within the grid Using the Tab key takes you outside the grid altogether ie TIP You can also enter the letter or number that precedes an option in a drop down list to make a Selection For instance if you want to jump from subfield z within the drop down list to subfield d simply press the letter d 5 Click Apply Result This stores the options you selected and a check mark displays in the check box directly to the left of the tab name indicating that values have been selected for that tab See Figure 2 10 which has values for the Books tab added and applied 007 Physical Description a Map fa Photocopy blueline print a Positive Figure 2 10 007 Physical description dialog box wi
117. Name Heading Types Filter Locations Filter Not applicable gt lt Not applicable gt Search for stein Cancel Clear Limit Remote Go to Googte Figure 3 59 Simultaneous Search dialog box If you clicked the Cancel button the Voyager Connection Options dialog box closes without connecting to a remote database Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 63 A IMPORTANT Searches on remote and multiple databases are limited to search types available to all connected databases Other limits may apply For instance connecting to multiple databases disables heading searches and Z39 50 databases do not support search limits For more information on simultaneous searching including setting up search attributes see the Voyager System Administration User s Guide 5 Enter your search criteria Table 3 11 lists the page numbers where you can find information about performing various searches Table 3 11 Page references for bibliographic search types Type Page Keyword 3 30 Non Keyword 3 36 Builder 3 49 History 3 53 6 Click the Do Search button Result One of the following occurs If you are performing a single database search the Titles Index list box opens with results from the search If you are performing a simultaneous search the Search Status dialog box opens see Figure
118. Optionally the Cataloging module provides a feature that can be selected to validate that a Unicode record contains only characters that conform to the MARC21 standard See Validation Tab Figure 10 2 on page 10 4 for more information Characteristics of a Unicode Formatted Record in Voyager Unicode formatted records can be identified by the ninth position of the Leader The ninth position contains the letter a See Figure C 1 Non Unicode records contain a space in the ninth position 7 Bib 66603 Agadat arba kosot menu adah mevo arah u mughah al i T ol x MARC System History Leader O06 005 20030722155851 0 O07 008 mose s 13687 is 000 _O_ feb _d Figure C 1 Leader Ninth Position NOTE Tag tables do not allow anything to be specified for position 9 in the Leader since it is used to identify Unicode records Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page C 2 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Voyager with Unicode Considerations Diacritics and MARC21 Compliance Considerations Diacritic characters have two components the alphabetic character and the diacritic symbol For example is made up of c and Non Unicode databases store the diacritic symbol followed by the alphabetic character as two separate characters For example fran ais is stored as fran cais This practice of storing characters is influenced by the MARC21 standard Unicode datab
119. Preview Display Button Description Next Retrieves more bib records if more than 250 records are affected by the heading change Bib Displays the bibliographic record Delete Removes a bib record from the preview list It will not be included in the heading change Global Headings Batch Job See the Voyager Technical User s Guide for a description of how to run each of the Global Headings batch jobs Refer to jobs 11 12 and 13 of the Cataloging batch job Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 9 15 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 9 16 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Contents Session Defaults and Preferences 10 1 e General Tab 10 2 e Validation Tab Figure 10 2 10 4 e Work Flow Tab Figure 10 4 10 8 e Item Defaults Tab Figure 10 5 10 10 e Folders Files Tab Figure 10 6 10 12 e Mapping Tab Figure 10 7 10 14 e Colors Fonts Tab Figure 10 8 10 16 Cataloging Menus 10 19 e File Menu 10 19 e Edit Menu 10 20 e Record Menu 10 22 e Item Menu 10 23 e Display Menu 10 24 e Options Menu 10 24 e Window Menu 10 24 e Help Menu 10 25 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 i Contents Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 10 ii Febru
120. SUD Government Documents _ E v E Figure 2 34 Selecting a call number hierarchy NOTE Each call number hierarchy is associated with a holdings item default location defined in Voyager s System Administration module for the appropriate Cataloging Policy Definition to which the holdings item default location belongs If you select a call number hierarchy in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences that is not associated with the specified holdings item default location you get a warning message see Figure 2 35 If you select Yes the classification scheme for the call number hierarchy is changed in Cataloging If you select No the classification scheme for the call number hierarchy is not changed You get the same message when you log into the Cataloging module if the hierarchy selected still does not match the holdings item default location Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 47 Voyager Cataloging Figure 2 35 Setting call number hierarchy to a non corresponding default holdings item location U Using Get Call Number from Bib Record Once setup is complete you are ready to use the following procedure to get the call number from the bibliographic record The procedure for getting a call number from a bibliographic record is shown in Procedure 2 17 Getting Call Number from Bibliographic Record on page 2 48
121. See Figure 3 63 To access the Profile Values tab of an Acquisitions Serials Profile Definition select Applications gt Security from the System Administration main menu or click the Security button The Voyager Security Configuration dialog box opens Click the Acq Serials Profiles button select the profile for which you want to set permissions and click the Profile Values tab For detailed information about setting permissions in Acquisitons Serials Profile Definitions see the Securing Your System gt Acquisitions Serials Profile Definitions section of the Voyager System Administration User s Guide Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 69 File Functions Help A oyager System Administration Security Acquisition Serials Profiles Names Acquisitions Clerk OPAC Configuration Acquisitions Supervisor Edit Search Serials Clerk Security I Test View Only Delete Acquisition Serials gt New Acquisition Serials Profile Erofies Profile Name Operator Profile Values Cont Locations m IV Add Update Purchase Orders J Add Update Item IV Add Update Vendor Cataloging Profiles IV Receive M Delete Purchase Orders F Delete Item IV Delete Vendors F View Gnily Purchase Orders R View nly Item F View Gnly Vendors IV Approve Purchase Orders Circulation Profiles IV Serials Check in IV Process Claims from Acqu
122. See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 9 i Contents Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 9 ii February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Authority Control Introduction When you select Record gt Save to Database Voyager s Cataloging module can automatically validate the current record against the appropriate authority record Fields that are subject to authority control such as authors series and subjects are checked against authority records in your database Depending on what option is selected on the Validation tab in Session Defaults and Preferences see Session Defaults and Preferences on page 10 1 one of the following occurs e If all headings are valid or if Bypass Authority Control is selected the record is saved to the database e lf there are invalid headings and you have not selected Display all the headings the Authority Validation dialog box opens and lists only the headings without an authority record e lf there are invalid headings and Display all the headings is selected the Authority Validation dialog box opens and lists all of the headings whether they are valid or not such as no authority record NOTE If you want to save bibliographic records in your current session to the database without running Authority Control Validation you can check the Bypass Authority Control Validation option in Options gt Session Defaults Otherwise all invalid
123. Systems Inc See notice on first page x February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Figures SSSSSSSaaz 1 Getting Started 1 1 Ellipsis Button 1 3 1 2 The Voyager Cataloging login dialog box 1 4 1 3 Select a cataloging location dialog box 1 5 D 2 Record Types and Creating 2 1 Voyager record relationships 2 2 2 2 Bibliographic Record MARC Tab 2 4 2 3 Bibliographic Leader Button 2 5 2 4 Leader dialog box 2 5 2 5 006 Button 2 7 2 6 006 dialog box 2 7 2 7 Bibliographic 006 Grid displayed and values set 2 8 2 8 007 Button 2 9 2 9 007 Physical Description dialog box 2 10 2 10 007 Physical description dialog box with grid displayed 2 11 2 11 008 Button 2 12 2 12 008 General Description dialog box 2 13 2 13 Variable fields grid with 245 tag row 2 14 2 14 Selection Column 2 15 2 15 Editing options 2 16 2 16 Bibliographic template selection 2 17 2 17 856 Links dialog box 2 23 2 18 Bibliographic Record System Tab 2 25 2 19 Bibliographic Record History Tab 2 27 2 20 Authority record MARC tab 2 29 2 21 Leader Button 2 30 2 22 Leader dialog box for authority information 2 30 2 23 008 Button 2 31 2 24 008 General Description Authority dialog box 2 32 2 25 Authority Record System Tab 2 34 2 26 Authority Record History Tab 2 36 2 27 Holdings Record MARC Tab 2 37 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xi Figures
124. UTION One or more spaces must be used after a comma to separate the different components of information specified in the cfg tag tables Do not use tabs Grid Templates In tag tables you can define grid templates as per your preferences These templates determine how the grid for fixed fields displays in the Cataloging module See Figure A 9 The templates used for a specific field subfield have their own stanzas that can be defined immediately following the stanza that references them or all together at the end of the configuration file See Figure A 8 for a sample template for subfield a Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page A 10 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode MARC Tag Tables 006 Books Tllustrations 1 006 008BooksIllustrations lA Lp Tllustrations 2 006 008BooksIllustrations 25 Le Illustrations 3 006 008BooksIllustrations 3 Ly _ Tllustrations 4 006 008BooksIllustrations 4 Ty Audience 006 008BooksAudience Sp dp e Form Of Item 006 008BooksItem 6 1 _ Contents 1 006 008BooksContents Ty Le Contents 2 006 008BooksContents 8y Lp Contents 3 006 008BooksContents 9p Ay Contents 4 006 008BooksContents LO Lye Govt Publications 006 008BooksGovtPub 11 1 _ Conf Publications 006 008BooksConfPub 12 17 0 Festschrift 006 008BooksFestschrift Loy dp sO Index 006 008BooksIndex t4 1 1 Literary Form 006 008BooksLiteraryForm Tey 1 0 Biography
125. Voyager with Unicode Authority Control Table 9 1 Authority Validation Dialog Box Column Description Validation Displays the results for validation of each tag in the record e Heading Validated an exact match was made e Cosmetic Differences the record matches except for differences in punctuation e Partial Heading Validation some of the subfields but not all match a heading e No Heading Validated a match could not be found to validate the heading NOTE Partial Validation works by trying to make an exact match of the subfields of the record If it does not it removes the rightmost subfield and performs a match based on that information It repeats this until it makes a match or it runs out of fields at which point it returns No Heading Validated Partial Validation does not match based on close matches of a subfield For example if you validate fa Mississippi River a partial match never identifies fa Mississippi River Authority as a candidate For that type of matching you must highlight the heading and click Search to perform a browse headings search which will list all the headings that closely but not exactly match that heading Bib Heading The bibliographic heading with subfield diameters Near Heading The bibliographic heading in the database that most closely matches the heading under validation The follow ing may display in the Near Heading column
126. Voyager Connection Options dialog box opens 2 From the list of Available Locations click the database s to which you want to connect then click the Add gt gt button double clicking the database name in the Available Locations also selects it NOTE If you select more than one database Voyager searches them simultaneously Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 61 3 62 IMPORTANT To search your local database along with remote database s select Local Database from the list of Available Locations Result Selected locations databases display in the Selected Locations list A check mark displays in the box directly to the left of the selected database name in the list of Available Locations see Figure 3 57 OPTIONAL To remove a database from the list of Selected Locations highlight the database and click the lt lt Delete button You can also double click the database name in either the list of Available Locations or Selected Locations To remove all the databases from the list of Selected Locations click the Clear button Yoyager Connection Options Available Locations Selected Locations Database Name Database Name Type Connectic O ATLA Citation Voyager Add gt gt GEOBASE M GEOBASE Citation 23950 Library of Congress 239 50 jy Library of Congres Bibliographic 23950 lt lt Delete Northwestern Universit
127. a in the 022 ta to the 773 x If an 022 tag is present in the source record but subfield a is not present or the 022 tag is not present in the source record the system does not consider this a match When a derivation field using this format does not match anything in the source record the system adds a 773 to the new record but does not add a subfield or any subfield data Again if the number 1234 5678 appears in the 022 ta of the source record the system maps that number into the 773 x of the new target record The difference in format determines how missing information is handled NOTE If the chosen template does not contain any derivation fields the system treats the template as a standard template see Templates on page 5 5 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 11 Multiple Subfields You can add extra characters to derivation fields in order to accommodate tags which are allowed to have repeating subfields For example if your source record includes 022 ta 1234 5678 ta 2234 5467 ta 3234 5467 and you want to map each of those subfields to separate subfields in your new record then the derivation field displays as follows 773 nn lt x 022a gt The addition of the x on the inside of the angle brackets maps all the 022 subfield data to separate 773 subfields as follows 773 nn x 1234 5678 tx 2234 5467 tx 3234 5467 Non Matching Subfields You
128. abaseName SearchStatus S O Local Database Done 136 Records Done 1000 Records SIG SESTCH Figure 3 18 Search Status dialog box To display the search results from the Search Status dialog box click the Show Results button This causes the Titles Index dialog box to open with the results for the databases you selected See Figure 3 19 If you are searching your local database as well as a remote database s the Titles Index will display records in the sort order you specify in System Administration depending on the type of search you performed See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details on sort order If you are searching only remote databases and not your local database as well the Titles Index displays in the sort order specified for the first database you selected in the Voyager Connection Options dialog box NOTE If you are searching more than one database the Titles Index dialog box contains a Status button and a Database column Click the Status button to bring up the Search Status dialog box The Database column lists the name of the database name as established in System Administration Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 21 The Titles Index dialog box opens immediately if you are searching only one database The Search Status dialog box does not display at all Titles Index Relevance Te Lono ee NONE
129. ables as they relate to your search NOTE The Limits button is not available for Heading searches See Search Limits on page 3 54 for more information URI Search Button If configured this button invokes a user defined URI Uniform Resource Identifier to search outside the Voyager database Find and Browse Searches The option buttons of either Find or Browse are available if you are performing a heading or call number search Selecting Find or Browse affects the search results received Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 38 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records A Find search returns specific finite results that match the search criteria For example a Find subject heading search Staff Subject Headings Search for war returns the results shown in Figure 3 33 In this example 339 matching records are found Headings List E Font Arial x Bibs Staff Subject Headings Search Heading Heading Type 19 War LC subject headings 3 War LC subject headings for children Authorized 1 War and civilization LC subject headings AuthiNote 1 War and education LC subject headings Reference 0 War and emergency legislation LC subject headings 1 War and emergency legislation Japan History LC subject headings AuthRet 0 War and emergency powers LC subject headings Authorized 2 War and emergency powers United States LC subjec
130. ading Types URN ee IV Name DOI IV Title lV Name Title IV Subject Image Server IV Subdivision Figure A 3 Cataloging format choices for MARC validation If you save a record to the database in Cataloging with MARC validation turned on and an inconsistency or error is found against the tag tables you receive an error report See Figure A 4 This alerts you to the inconsistency or error discovered so that you can make the necessary changes to the record If you do not make the changes necessary to validate the record against the tag tables you are not able to save the record to the database Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page A 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode MARC Tag Tables NOTE MARC validation can be bypassed if you check the Bypass MARC Validation or Bypass MARC21 Character set validation check box on the Validation tab of Session Defaults and Preferences we MARC Error Report Mandatory subfield a missing in 051 field Indicator 1 in 600 field has an invalid value Figure A 4 Sample report if MARC validation finds an error while saving a record to the database Structure of MARC Tag Tables Overview All the MARC tag tables contain similar structural components For the most part they all begin with comments see Figure A 5 and subsequently stanzas see Stanzas in the MARC Tag Tables on page A 6 outlining fields and or their contents and values
131. ally if configured there are two additional features available on each tab regardless of the type of search These features are remote searching and a user defined search Remote Searching The Remote button enables you to select connect to search and import records from other databases The Remote button displays in the Search dialog box only if you have defined remote databases to which you can connect in System Administration See Database Defintions in the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details For more information see Remote Databases on page 3 58 User Defined Alternate Search Button Optionally users can add another button on the Search dialog box providing the capability to invoke a URI Uniform Resource Identifier to search outside the Voyager database An example of this user defined feature is shown in Figure 3 24 the button labeled Google has been set up as a URI search option Keyword Non Keyword Builder History Search by Find Ls Titl til Browse es Heading Types Filter Locations Filter ble Not applicable Search for war and peace Cancel Clear Limit Remote Google Figure 3 24 Search dialog box with user defined alternate search button Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 29 This alternate search function can be configured to do either of the following e Take the text str
132. aloging s Session Defaults and Preferences See Folders Files Tab Figure 10 6 on page 10 12 for details NOTE If Voyager does not find a folder called work one will be created for you However you can open or save records to any directory Click the appropriate record name from the work folder The suffix of the record file indicates what type of record it is Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 9 Result The record name is highlighted 3 Click Open to open the record or click Cancel to close the dialog box without opening a record Result Open displays the Select work records dialog box Cancel returns you to the main Cataloging display NOTE Because the Suppress from OPAC check box is not a part of the MARC 21 record that information is not saved when the record is saved as a work record Each time that you retrieve a work record in order to save it to the database the Suppress from OPAC check box must be marked appropriately From the OPAC To retrieve a record from the Online Public Access Catalog OPAC you must use Record gt Search to find and open a record For more information see Search Dialog Box on page 3 28 Bibliographic Tree 3 10 When you click the Hierarchy button see Figure 3 10 from an open record or select Record gt Show Associated Records from the Cataloging toolbar the bibliographic holdings items and
133. ample of the Global Change workflow a Achange is made to an authority heading by an online edit online replace import or Bulk Import and saved to the database The change is automatically queued up to the Global Headings Change Queue b Open the queue by pressing Ctrl G or by selecting File gt Global Headings Change from the main menu The heading that is visible is the old authority heading before it was changed The Authority record can be viewed by clicking the heading and then clicking the Auth button c The first batch server process batch job 11 is run d The first stage of change displays in the Global Headings Change Queue You can view the heading changes that were made to the original Authority record e Run the second batch job batch job 12 and view the Global Headings Change Queue again Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 9 8 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Authority Control f This allows you to view changes that are to be made to authority and bibliographic records that have that heading To see a list of bibliographic records associated with the new heading highlight the new heading and click the Preview button The bib records display in the lower portion of the Global Headings Change dialog box g Place a check in the process flag check box or highlight the new heading and click the Process button The process flag marks the change to be executed by t
134. anzas for code types tabs for each tag table format Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode MARC Tag Tables e 006Code e 007Code e 008Code e 000Code Each stanza pertains to a particular fixed field For example 000Code pertains to the Leader field Ay IMPORTANT Do not change the names of the four code type tab stanzas 000Code 006Code 007Code and 008Code These stanza headings are used by the program to look for the tab data for their respective 00x type Altering these stanza names or adding additional stanzas with these names will cause unpredictable results The 00xCode stanzas define the following e The name of the tabs that display in the Cataloging module for each record type e The order of the tabs that display in the Cataloging module for each record type e The template used for each tab in the Cataloging module for each record type Names of Tabs in the Cataloging Module The 006Code 007Code 008Code and 000Code stanzas of the Xmarcfix cfg tag tables define the names of the tabs that display in the Cataloging module for the fixed fields of each record type The names of the tabs are listed directly after the stanza name See Figure A 12 The letter at the beginning of each line is called the code type This is an industry standard and should not be altered This value is also used by the program to reference other
135. apter 10 Appendix A Getting Started Chapter 1 provides an overview of Cataloging including logging into the application printing screens and exiting ffrom the application Record Types and Creating Chapter 2 discusses the different types of records used by the Voyager system to contain your MARC records and procedures for editing the leader and other related MARC tags Creating Opening and Viewing Records Chapter 3 details the creation of new records and opening and viewing existing records Changing Saving and Printing Information Chapter 4 details editing records saving edited records and printing records spine and piece labels Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking Chapter 5 details the implementation and use of bibliographic record linking from within the Cataloging module for related records Diacritics and Non Roman Characters Chapter 6 details the implementation and considerations of diacritics and non Roman characters in a Unicode environment Pick and Scan Chapter 7 details the procedure for using the Pick and Scan feature Templates Chapter 8 details the procedure for using templates when working with new records Authority Control Chapter 9 details the methods of maintaining Authority Control Session Defaults and Menu Options Chapter 10 details Session Defaults and Preferences for application throughout the Catalo
136. ary 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Session Defaults and Preferences You can access the Session Defaults and Preferences dialog box by selecting Options gt Preferences From this dialog box you can change a number of defaults which are presented on several tabs e General e Validation e Work Flow e Item Defaults e Folders e Mapping e Colors Fonts After you select your defaults click OK to accept them or click Cancel to close the dialog without applying any of your selections The defaults you choose are saved when you exit the Cataloging module Preferences are machine specific If more than one person uses the same workstation each person uses the same defaults Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 1 General Tab Customize the options on the General tab see Figure 10 1 to match your preferences using Table 10 1 for a description of each option 5 Session Defaulis and Preferences ohn Hopkin s Acquisition None E None Figure 10 1 Cataloging Session Defaults and Preferences General tab Table 10 1 General tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Holdings Item default Select the default location for all holdings and item records that location you create by clicking the drop down arrow Call Number Select the call number hierarchy whic
137. as a grid i n Complete authority record Figure 2 22 Leader dialog box for authority information 2 Choose a record status and an encoding level from the appropriate drop down menus by clicking the cell and then the down arrow to display the drop down menu selections To display and browse drop down menu selections click the down arrow or press F4 or the space bar Use the up and down arrows on your keyboard to navigate within the drop down menu From within a drop down menu you can enter the letter or number that precedes a particular selection For instance if you want to jump from subfield z within the drop down menu to subfield a you can simply press the letter a 3 Click OK to exit and save your work click Cancel or Esc to exit without saving Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 30 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Authority 008 Fixed Field The 008 is a header in the main record used to describe the main format in the Leader The 008 is required and non repeatable The Authority 008 field displays as a grid which is completely configurable using Voyager s MARC tag tables See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for details on the MARC tag tables The procedure for configuring the Authority 008 Field is shown in Procedure 2 9 Configuring the Authority 008 Field on page 2 31 Procedure 2 9 Configuring the Authority 008 Field Use the f
138. ases store the alphabetic character first and then the diacritic character as two separate characters For example frangais is stored as franc ais Also the diacritic character may be stored as a single entity such as It is possible that when using certain Windows based programs diacritic characters are generated with a different internal value that allows the two components to be stored as one character This may occur in the Voyager environment when you copy a diacritic character from a Windows based program and paste it into a Voyager record Voyager has the flexibility to store the diacritic character in this alternative format as a single character NOTE Even though a diacritic character may be stored as two separate components the system displays it as one character MARC21 Compliance Considerations When exchanging records with MARC21 compliant systems the standard dictates that in almost all cases the diacritic character be stored as two component pieces the diacritic symbol first followed by the alphabetic character When exporting from the Voyager with Unicode system simply indicate MARC21 MARC8 code m with the a parameter aM when running bulk export and the system handles the order of the alphabetic character and the diacritic for the receiving MARC21 compliant system See the Voyager Technical User s Guide for more information regarding bulk export Additionally you can use the decomposition feature selectable
139. ate Result The selected template displays 3 Select File gt Template gt Delete from the menu Result The message Are you sure you want to delete the selected template prompts you See Figure 5 6 Voyager Cataloging N Are you sure you want to delete x CWO Y2000 3 CATALOGTEMPLATE BIBM TEM Figure 5 6 Verify delete template message 4 Click Yes to delete the selected template or click No to close the dialog box without deleting the selected template MARC Record Derivation Using Cataloging Templates In the section Templates on page 5 5 you learned how to create edit and delete templates for use in the Cataloging module You can use the functionality of templates to quickly create related records Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 5 8 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking Related records are linked to each other by coordinated subfield values For example the 773 x in the target or child record is linked to the 022 ta in the source or parent record Another example of related records is the 780 tx ina successor serial title is related to the 022 ta of the predecessor serial title MARC record derivation allows you to use existing template functionality to create new related MARC records whether they are bibliographic holdings or authority records The new records can include static data from the template as
140. ate the new template by completing the Leader fixed fields and variable fields For more information on these fields see the section about that particular record type For more information see Bibliographic Records on page 2 3 Authority Records on page 2 28 and Holdings Records on page 2 36 Select File gt Save As Enter the name you want for your template The suffix for the file must be tem such as thesis tem for example NOTE When a template is saved it is not validated against authority records or the MARC tag table The procedure for editing a template is shown in Procedure 8 2 Editing a Template on page 8 2 Procedure 8 2 Editing a Template 8 2 Use the following to edit a template Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Templates eee aaa Select File gt Template gt Edit Select the template you want to edit and click Open Result The template you selected opens Edit the template by changing the Leader fixed fields and variable fields For more information on these fields see the section about that particular record type For more information see Bibliographic Records on page 2 3 Authority Records on page 2 28 and Holdings Records on page 2 36 To edit the template you can use the same commands as you use for editing a record See Edit Menu on page 10 20 for more information Select File gt Save to save the template with the
141. ation cammain Cambridge main library classification cammed Cambridge medical library classification camgen Cambridge generic library classification dnal National Agricultural Library NAL classification NOTE The CACODOCS classification and the UDC classification can be specified in two ways See Table B 4 Table B 4 CACODOCS and UDC classifications 1st Indicator Value Subfield Value Description 7 2 cacodoc Canadian Commissioner of Documents CACODOCS classification c Canadian Commissioner of Documents CACODOCS classification 7 2 udc Universal Decimal Classification UDC Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page B 2 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Voyager Call Number Logic Processing Table B 4 CACODOCS and UDC classifications 1st Indicator Value Subfield Value Description u Universal Decimal Classification UDC With these changes to Voyager 2001 1 creation of other non standard classification codes is possible as a special request For other non standard codes to be implemented normalization rules need to be written and codes added to the Voyager schema as valid codes Use of any new non standard code requires a call number index regen to index the existing records with this code To place a request for development of a non standard classification code contact Endeavor Customer Support IMPORTANT For librari
142. ault template is the quickest method of record creation You can change your default template at any time The procedure for creating new records using templates is shown in Procedure 5 6 Creating New Records Using Templates on page 5 25 Procedure 5 6 Creating New Records Using Templates Use the following to create new records using templates Search for and display the source bibliographic record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 25 For more information about searching in the Cataloging module see the Voyager Cataloging User s Guide Click the New button on the Cataloging toolbar Result The system automatically uses the default template defined in the Bib field on the Folders Files tab of Session Defaults and Preferences to create the new record Edit the new record as necessary If you are using a template containing derivation fields make sure the information is mapped correctly If a derivation field displays in the new record it may be because the source record did not contain the tag specified Save the new record to the database For more information about Saving options in the Cataloging module see the Saving and Printing Information section of the Voyager Cataloging User s Guide Close the new record so the source record is again active Repeat steps 2 through 5 until you have created all the necessary related records
143. b to display the following input and editing options See Figure 2 14 and Figure 2 15 e Cut this field e Copy this field e Paste before this field e Move this field up by one moves the focus row up by one row e Move this field down by one moves the focus row down by one row e Delete this field e Validate heading in the field This menu dynamically changes for the conditions of each row Only the active options display NOTE These menu options only apply to the row that you clicked When more than one row is selected use the menu bar options for cut copy or delete MARC System History Leader 00976sam 42200205 a 450 005 20030916135611 0 011120 s 2001 ctu M 12 Subfield Data ta CStRLINJCTYHO1 tc ta temp record for tes i ta Bernstein Steven 1 2 6880 01 ta Asamph Steven Jay Bernstein Figure 2 14 Selection Column Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 15 Cut this Field Copy this field Paste before this field Move this field up by one Move this field down by one Delete this field Validate Heading in this field Figure 2 15 Editing options The procedure for adding and editing variable fields is shown in Procedure 2 5 Adding and Editing Variable Fields on page 2 16 Procedure 2 5 Adding and Editing Variable Fields 2 16 Use the following to add and edit variable fields Cli
144. ble or disable this feature by clicking the Check for Duplicate Item Barcodes check box on the Work Flow tab in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences see Figure 2 43 Session Defaults and Preferences a General Validation Work Flow l ltem Defaults Folders Files Mapping Colors Fonts J Retain last search Automatic truncation for non keyword searches Tl Display bibliographic record directly if search results in only one title V Always create a holding when adding holdings to a bib i e do not show existing holdings first T Display item record directly if item retrieve results in only one item I Sequence new items at top J Sequence new e items at top IV Check for Duplicate Item Barcodes Suppress confirmation message upon successful save Cancel Figure 2 43 Enabling Disabling the Check for Duplicate Barcodes option Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 57 Header Information You cannot add to or change the item record information described in Table 2 7 Table 2 7 Item Record Header Information Field Name Description Title s Lists the title of the item If more than one biblio graphic record is attached to that item record such as two books in one binding this section displays a drop down list with all associated titles Location The location s name from the holdings record Call The
145. bruary 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Table 10 14 Window Menu Option Description Arrange Icons Arranges icons for minimized windows at the bot tom of the main window Window Lists currently open document windows A check 1 253 mark displays in front of the active document window Select one to make that record active The long number is the record ID Help Menu The contents of the Help menu is shown in Table 10 15 Table 10 15 Option Description Help Topics Displays a list of Cataloging help topics Endeavor on the Web Allows you to connect to the Endeavor Home Page or to Endeavor Support Web About Cataloging Displays the copyright notice and version num ber of your copy of Voyager Cataloging Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 25 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 10 26 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode ET MARC Tag Tables Introduction The MARC tag tables define various types of records fields and subfields for bibliographic and authority records The tag tables are located in the Voyager Catalog Tagtable directory on the client PC See Figure A 1 Tag tables are configuration files identified by the cfg file extension The tag table configuration files can be modified to match your requirements They can be edi
146. bruary 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 39 In this example the system displays the Browse Headings List that users can scroll through using the arrow buttons see Table 3 6 on page 3 42 to find the wanted heading Heading Searches by Call Number When doing a non keyword search by call number Voyager accepts Dewey call numbers that have more than one decimal point as well as call numbers that only have a decimal point after the Dewey root Cutter combination for example 305 1 M887 no 2 506 N56 v 8 Also normalization of Dewey call numbers including dates was adjusted to ensure proper sorting in call number indexes for example 321 A65 1998 Regarding the display of call numbers with 852 k and 852 m call number prefix and suffix fields you can include prefixes and suffixes in all of Voyager s call number displays When you perform a Browse search for a call number with a prefix or a suffix you see the prefix or suffix in the results list as well as in the actual record itself Non Keyword Search Results Headings List 3 40 Results of a Non keyword search display in either a Titles Index or a Headings List A heading search returns results in a Headings List see Figure 3 35 A left anchored or non headings search returns results in a Titles Index see Keyword Search Results The Titles Index on page 3 32 In a Headings List users can view References Ref Notes Notes as well as Scope Notes Narrower terms See an
147. cell to cell within the grid To use the latter first click in a particular cell and then use the up and down arrows to navigate from cell to cell Do not click the down arrow This causes you to browse the selections within a particular drop down menu Note that you cannot use the Tab key to move from cell to cell on the grid This takes you outside the grid altogether To display and browse drop down menu selections click the down arrow or press F4 or the space bar Use the up and down arrows on your keyboard to navigate within the drop down menu From within a drop down menu you can enter the letter or number that precedes a particular selection For instance if you want to jump from subfield z within the drop down menu to subfield a you can simply press the letter a NOTE For a Holdings record created in the Cataloging module the default Method of Acquisition is u for unknown Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 43 4 After you make your selections click OK to exit and save your work click Cancel or Esc to exit without saving Variable Fields The Variable Fields grid allows you to add Tags with First and Second Indicators and Bibliographic Data subfields The system grid template provides the required Location Call Number 852 tag row with the subfield b entered with the location specified in Session Defaults see 10 1 NOTE Voyager accept
148. ches inches 12 Piece LabelHeight The height of the piece label in inches abelWidth The width of the piece label in inches Figure 4 6 Description of options in the Print Options Print Template The Print T Bibliographic stanza Spine Print Template Piece Stanza mplate Spine XXX and Print Template Piece XXX stanzas can be completely customized Any type of information can be entered into the stanza as well as any additional text or field labels See Figure 4 7 and Figure 4 8 Line Name Addr1 DN O Be W N F Print Template Spine Serial Issue Component Name F600 Enum Chron F601 Receipt Date F602 B F102 b U F510 u Figure 4 7 Sample Print Template Spine XXX stanza 4 18 February 2004 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information Line as Print Template Piece Serial Issue 2 Name B F102 b 3 Addr1l U F510 u 4 Component Name F600 5 Enum Chron F601 6 Receipt Date F602 Figure 4 8 Sample Print Template Piece XXX stanza Whatever you enter in the Print Template Spine XXX or Print Template Piece XXX stanzas prints on the label The text that you enter displays onscreen To get specific information such as the Title from the database you can enter action codes If you want nothing to display in
149. ck Record gt New gt Bibliographic and select a bibliographic template See the example in Figure 2 16 Result The MARC tab of a new bibliographic record displays with the leaders and variable fields grid Click the Subfield Data cell to enter the a information for the 245 tag Result The content for ta is entered NOTE When you enter non Roman characters for a language that is read right to left the system dynamically adjusts for each subfield affected to flow the text in the proper direction The Left Right arrows on the keyboard adapt for movement through the text that is read right to left A IMPORTANT Hebrew and or Arabic language support needs to be installed in the operating system for them to display in the correct order Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating NOTE Backspacing to erase diacritic characters may require you to press the backspace key twice Diacritc characters are usually stored in the system as two separate components the alphabetic character first and then the diacritic character See Diacritics and Non Roman Characters on page 6 1 and Voyager with Unicode Considerations on page C 1 for more information 3 Click Edit gt Insert Field Before F3 or Edit gt Insert Field After F4 to add a tag to the grid Result This inserts a field before or after the current row 4 Click the Tag cell and enter a
150. comes active allowing you to delete what you have applied Click Close Result You exit the 006 linking field dialog box Bibliographic 007 Fixed Field The 007 field is a repeatable field that allows you to add other material categories The Bibliographic 007 field displays as a grid which is completely configurable using Voyager s MARC tag tables See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for details on the MARC tag tables The procedure for editing the 007 field on the MARC tab is shown in Procedure 2 3 Editing the 007 Field on page 2 9 Procedure 2 3 Editing the 007 Field Use the following to edit the 007 field on the MARC tab of an open bibliographic record Click the 007 button see Figure 2 8 from the MARC tab of an open bibliographic record Figure 2 8 007 Button Result The 007 field displays a tabbed dialog box see Figure 2 9 from which you can select a material category Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 9 2 10 007 Physical Description a Map Figure 2 9 007 Physical Description dialog box Select a tab representing the physical material you want to enter Result A blank tab displays with the New button active ae TIP You can use a mouse or keyboard shortcuts to access tabs To use the keyboard shortcut hold the Alt key and type the letter that is underlined in the tab name such as Alt m to access the
151. cord to the database For more information about Saving options in the Cataloging module see the Saving and Printing Information section of the Voyager Cataloging User s Guide 6 Close the new record so the source record is again active 7 Repeat steps 2 through 6 until you have created all the necessary related records Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 27 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 5 28 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Diacritics and Non Roman Characters Contents Introduction 6 1 Special Character Entry 6 1 Special Character Mode 6 3 e Special Character Mode Mapping 6 3 Special Characters cfg 6 7 e File Contents 6 7 First Field 6 7 Second Field 6 8 Third Field 6 8 Microsoft Character Map 6 8 Regional Options for Non Roman Characters 6 8 Importing Records with Non Roman Characters 6 9 Other Diacritic Considerations 6 9 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 6 i Contents Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 6 ii February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Diacritics and Non Roman Characters Introduction Voyager supports Unicode in the Cataloging client This provides the capability to enter diacritic and non Roman characters in MARC records There are several methods for entering d
152. ctive record can be determined by the highlighted Title Bar Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 67 Yoyager Cataloging Fie Edit Record Display Options Window Help Eee 1ABM2 Sa 5 P Make a Copy Save to DB New Hidgs Get Hidgs New Items Get tems Hierarchy Help Change owning library wn by Elmer Boyd Smith Retrieve by record id Retrieve by barcode Unlink holding From bibliographic Relink holding to bibliographic Show Associated Records Retrieve Holdings Create Holdings Retrieve Items Create Items Retrieve Authorities View Line Items in Acquisitions Ctrl M Get callinumber From bib record Ctr awn by Elmer Boyd Smith Verify 856 links Ctrl K C1929 Validate heading Ctri H Save to Database Ctrl B Save to Database and Close Ctrl Z System Control Number 4 21PM 4 Figure 3 62 Send Record To WebVoyage Viewing and Editing Line Items Acquisitions in Cataloging The Cataloging in Acquisitions or Cat in the Acq feature allows you to view and edit a bibliographic record in the Cataloging module from a line item in the Acquisitions module See the Voyager Acquisitions User s Guide for details on Cat in the Acq In order to improve workflow even further the Acquisitions in Cataloging or Acq in the Cat feature provides the second half of the two way
153. d Types and Creating To delete a tag click the row label the grey left column Press the Delete key on the keyboard and respond to the confirmation message NOTE A function has been added to the Cataloging module allowing you to automatically add a bibliographic record call number 852 h and 852 i into a holdings record This function is discussed in Get Call Number from Bib Record on page 2 45 Get Call Number from Bib Record The get call number from bib record function improves material processing by automatically adding a call number to an existing MFHD This MFHD can either lack a call number or contain an existing call number that needs to be replaced Workflow Examples Below are two instances in which the get call number from bib record function would be useful e The get call number from bib record function would be useful when a MFHD is created without a call number e g in Acquisitions Holdings records do not as a rule include a call number when they are created in Acquisitions Usually they contain only a location 852 b field e Get call number from bib record would also be useful when an existing MFHD has a call number that is being replaced Perhaps your library is engaging in a retrospective conversion or a re classification project in which call numbers are being reviewed and or replaced In either of these instances using the get call number from bib record function would simplify the insertion of t
154. d or See Also reference s associated with the heading Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Headings List a Font arial x Bibs Staff Subject Headings Search Heading Heading Type 19 War LC subject headings 3 War LC subject headings for children 1 War and civilization LC subject headings 1 War and education LC subject headings 1 War and emergency legislation Japan History LC subject headings 2 War and emergency powers United States LC subject headings 1 War and emergency powers United States History LC subject headings 1 War and literature LC subject headings 3 War and society LC subject headings 1 War and society Perindicals LC subiect headinas zi Cancel Search auno 74 Headings Found Search Staff Subject Headings Search war Figure 3 35 Headings List i TIP You can access the Headings List by selecting Display gt Headings List or by clicking the Headings List button Figure 3 36 Headings Figure 3 36 Headings List Button NOTE If your search retrieves more than 100 headings the Stop button becomes active You can then click the Stop button to cancel the retrieval of more headings see Figure 3 37 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 41 Figure 3 37 Stop button see
155. dard folders within the Catalog folder They are MARCTemplate Tag Tables and Template NOTE The default bibliographic holdings and authority templates are located in the Template folder You can save any new templates that you create to that folder but it is not required If you are sharing templates among coworkers you could create a Template folder on a network that everyone can access Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking 6 Double click the Template folder 7 Click the OK button in the Select Directory dialog box to save your selection to the Folders Files tab and close the dialog box Folders Work OT Template c Voyager Catalog T emplate E Import i CdS Figure 5 16 Default Template folder selected on Folders Files tab Click the OK button to close the Session Defaults and Preferences dialog box and save your changes See Procedure 5 7 Creating New Records Using a Default Folder on page 5 26 to learn how to use a default folder when creating new MARC records Once you have created a template using derivation fields you can begin creating new records For more information about creating and editing MARC records in the Cataloging module see the Voyager Cataloging User s Guide If you need to create many new related records from one source record selecting a def
156. ding the label The Print Template Spine XXX stanza contains the information and the layout for printing the spine label The Print Template Piece XXX stanza contains the information and the layout for printing the piece label There is also a single Templates stanza at the beginning of the file Templates Stanza The Templates stanza contains the list of the different types of templates that can be customized The Templates stanza cannot be changed Editing the Templates stanza in any way causes label printing to become unpredictable Print Options XXX Stanza The Print Options XXX stanza contains formatting and other information on each type of record for which a label can be created See Figure 4 6 for a description of the options available in the Print Options XXX stanza Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 17 Line 1 Print Options Bibliographic 2 StandardFont The name of the default font 3 StandardFontSize The size of the default font 4 AlternateFont The name of the alternate font 5 AlternateFontSize The size of the alternate font 6 Copies The number of copies that are to be printed 7 TabWidth The width in inches that the tab code T represents 8 Margin The label s left margin in inches 9 SpineLabelHeight The height of the spine label in 10 SpineLabelWidth The width of the spine label in J Piec in
157. dministration module For details on this process see the Voyager System Administration User s Guide Voyager Connection Options _ DatabaseName Type E Local Database Bibliographic Voyager Northwestern Bibliographic Voyager OCLC Bibliographic Z23950 e 996 Citation 23950 une RLG Bibliographic 23950 SilverPlatter Citation Z3950 M Wilson Art Abstracts Citation Z3950 239 50 on Kumba Bibliographic 23950 Figure 3 15 Voyager Connection Options dialog box The Voyager Connection Options dialog box is divided into three sections e Available Locations e Selected Locations e Information About Available Locations This section contains a list of all the databases as you have defined in System Administration to which you are able to connect and search You can navigate through this list by clicking a particular database and using the up and down arrows on your keyboard Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records The list is divided into four columns e The first column contains a check box indicating whether or not the database is selected as one to connect to and search e The Database Name column indicates the name of the database to which you are connecting e The Connection column indicates the type of connection for th
158. drop down menu selections NOTE Use either the mouse or the up down arrow keys on your keyboard to move from cell to cell within the grid or from option to option in the drop down lists The Tab key is not available for use within the grid Using the Tab key takes you outside the grid altogether ae TIP You can also enter the letter or number that precedes an option in a drop down list to make a Selection For instance if you want to jump from subfield z within the drop down list to subfield a simply press the letter a 5 Click Apply Result This stores the options you selected and a check mark displays in the check box directly to the left of the tab name indicating that values have been selected for that tab See Figure 2 7 which has values for the Books tab added and applied 006 Additional Material Characteristics a Books Portraits No illustrations No illustrations No illustrations Adult None of the following No specified nature of contents No specified nature of contents No specified nature of contents No specified nature of contents Not a government publication Not a conference publication Not a festschrift c e a 0 Figure 2 7 Bibliographic 006 Grid displayed and values set Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 8 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating NOTE The Delete button be
159. ds listing applicable profiles for Cinema Journal 5 3 5 2 Preceding title for Cinema Journal and applicable profiles 5 4 5 3 No related records message 5 4 5 4 Create a New Record dialog box 5 6 5 5 Open Template File dialog box 5 7 5 6 Verify delete template message 5 8 5 7 Examples of derivation fields 5 9 5 8 Menu bar in the Cataloging module 5 19 5 9 Session Defaults and Preferences dialog box 5 20 5 10 Folders Files tab for Session Defaults and Preferences 5 20 5 11 Select Bibliographic Template dialog box no default Template folder 5 21 5 12 Template files in the Template folder 5 22 5 13 Bib template selected on Folders Files tab 5 22 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xv Figures 5 14 Menu bar in the Cataloging module 5 23 5 15 Select Directory dialog box 5 24 5 16 Default Template folder selected on Folders Files tab 5 25 E 6 Diacritics and Non Roman Characters 6 1 Special Character Entry 6 2 E 7 Pick and Scan 7 14 Pick and Scan dialog box 7 2 7 2 Permanent Location options 7 3 7 3 Temporary Type options 7 4 7 4 Delete warning message 7 4 7 5 Item Status Clear All single step 7 5 7 6 Items tab 7 6 7 7 Barcode text box 7 7 7 8 Check mark button 7 7 7 9 Select File ellipsis 7 8 7 10 Filename path entered 7 8 7 11 Carriage return delimited file 7 9 7 12 Processing report window 7 9 7 13 Item barc
160. ds to a bibliographic utility on a regular basis to have holdings records attached You can use Voyager s Pmarcexport program to export records See the Voyager Technical User s Guide for details Checking the OK to export box confirms that the bibliographic record is acceptable for export You must click the Save to Database button for it to take effect If the OK to export box already contains a check mark that indicates that an operator has either approved the record for export at an earlier date or the record was automatically authorized for export when it was imported To automatically mark records as OK to export see the Bulk Export of MARC Records section of the Voyager Technical User s Guide When the OK to export box is checked two radio buttons become active on the System tab allowing you to either select the last date on which the OK to export option was set or to select today s date Change to Today radio button Selecting the Change to Today radio button and then clicking the Save to Database button will cause the OK to export date to change to today s date Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 25 NOTE The OK to export option resets during the actual export process The date operator and location at which the OK to export option was last set display below the OK to export check box and the two radio buttons indicating export dates in the La
161. dure for editing the 006 field on the MARC tab is shown in Procedure 2 2 Editing the 006 Field on page 2 6 Procedure 2 2 Editing the 006 Field 2 6 Use the following to edit the 006 field on the MARC tab of an open bibliographic record Click the 006 button see Figure 2 5 on the MARC tab of an open bibliographic record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Figure 2 5 006 Button Result The 006 field displays a tabbed dialog box see Figure 2 6 from which you can select a bibliographic format type 006 Additional Material Characteristics a Books Figure 2 6 006 dialog box 2 Select a tab representing the bibliographic format type you want to enter Result A blank tab displays with the New button active a TIP You can use the mouse or keyboard shortcuts to access tabs To use the keyboard shortcut hold the Alt key and type the letter that is underlined in the tab name such as Alt b to access the Books tab See MARC Taq Tables on page A 1 for details on how to define your own keyboard access keys 3 Click the New button Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 7 Result A grid displays with various options see Figure 2 7 4 Select options from the grid by clicking a particular cell and the down arrow to display
162. e Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Bibliographies Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Not a conference publication Figure 2 12 008 General Description dialog box 2 Enter the required information in the 008 dialog box These fields accept ASCII characters See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for more information Use either the mouse or the up down arrow keys on your keyboard to move from cell to cell within the grid or from option to option in the drop down lists The Tab key is not available for use within the grid Using the Tab key takes you outside the grid altogether Result The required information is identified for the 008 field NOTE The date information must be 4 characters long The first character must be a digit greater than zero followed by another digit or the characters u x y or a question mark re TIP You can also enter the letter or number that precedes an option in a drop down list to make a Selection For instance if you want to jump from subfield t within the drop down list to subfield b simply press the letter b Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voya
163. e Creating and Opening Records 3 1 Creating a Record 3 1 Opening a Record 3 8 From a Work Folder 3 8 From the OPAC 3 10 Bibliographic Tree 3 10 Importing Records 3 11 Importing Records From a File 3 12 Importing Records From Another Database 3 15 Invalid Records 3 24 Accessing Replaced or Deleted Files 3 24 Creating New Bibliographic Records from Image Server 3 25 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode v Contents e Viewing Information 3 27 e Search Dialog Box 3 28 Remote Searching 3 29 User Defined Alternate Search Button 3 29 Setting Search Preferences 3 30 Retain Last Search 3 30 Automatic Truncation for Non Keyword Searches 3 30 Keyword Tab and Keyword Searching 3 30 Keyword Search Results The Titles Index 3 32 Non Keyword Tab and Heading and Non Keyword Left Anchored Searching 3 36 Find and Browse Searches 3 38 Heading Searches by Call Number 3 40 Non Keyword Search Results Headings List 3 40 Reference Information Dialog Box 3 43 Builder Tab and Builder Searching 3 49 History tab 3 53 Search Limits 3 54 Remote Databases 3 58 e Additional Options for Displaying a Record Web Server http POST3 67 e Viewing and Editing Line Items Acquisitions in Cataloging 3 68 System Administration Setup 3 69 e Retrieving Records Associated with Other Records 3 75 e Viewing Holdings Locations 3 79 e Linking and Unlinking Records 3 80 Link Item to Bib
164. e database such as Voyager or Z39 50 e The Type column indicates the type of database like Bibliographic or Citation Remember the database name connection type and so on for each database is established and defined in the Database Definitions portion of Voyager s System Administration module See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details Selected Locations This section includes one column listing the databases by database name you have selected Information About This section contains the description of the database highlighted in the list of Available Locations The database does not have to be listed in Selected Locations for the description to display This description is established in a free text field in the Database Definitions portion of Voyager s System Administration module and may or may not contain the name of the database or the associated institution s online catalog See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details 3 You can add and remove databases from the list of Available Locations Selecting a Database From the list of Available Locations highlight one by one the database s to which you want to connect and click the Add gt gt button or Alt A This moves the database name over to the list of Selected Locations Figure 3 16 You can Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 17 3 18 al
165. e drop down menu stanza in which valid selections are outlined The character position for values in the records integer values The length of the selection Default values for drop down menus and masks for text boxes IMPORTANT Template configuration stanzas must have five comma delimited entries columns per line or the program will not function properly See Figure A 15 for an example of a template configuration stanza from a Bmarcfix cfg file using the MARC21 tag table format Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page A 18 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode MARC Tag Tables 008 Books Publication Status OO08PublicationStatus Date 1 yyyy lt lt lt TEXT gt gt gt 7 4 aaaa Date 2 yyyy lt lt lt TEXT gt gt gt 11 4 aaaa Place of Publication Country 153i XE Tllustrations 1 006 008BooksIllustrations 18 1 _ Illustrations 2 006 008BooksIllustrations 19 1 _ Illustrations 3 006 008BooksIllustrations 20 1 _ Illustrations 4 006 008BooksIllustrations 21 1 _ Audience 006 008BooksAudience 227 Lp Form of Item 006 008BooksItem 234 Aig Contents 1 006 008BooksContents 2A oe Contents 2 006 008BooksContents 257 1g Contents 3 006 008BooksContents Diop leg Contents 4 006 008BooksContents 2p gas Govt Publication 006 008BooksGovtPub 2871p Conf Publication 006 008BooksConfPub 29 Ang Festschrift 006 008BooksFestschrift 30
166. e second half of the two way communication between the Acquisitions and Cataloging modules See the Voyager Acquisitions User s Guide for details Cat in the Acq allows you to view and then edit a MARC record in the Cataloging module from the associated line item in the Acquisitions module For details and instructions on using the Acq in the Cat feature see Viewing and Editing Line Items Acquisitions in Cataloging on page 3 68 Authority Records An Authority Record is created when you select an authority template from the Select Authority Template dialog box see Creating a Record on page 3 1 or when you click Create from the Authority Validation dialog see Chapter 9 Introduction on page 9 1 The authority record contains three tabs e MARC tab e System tab e History tab When you create a new authority record only the MARC and System tabs display since the record has no history yet MARC Tab 2 28 The MARC tab of an authority record see Figure 2 20 contains a Leader an 008 fixed field and variable fields All values correspond to the published MARC standard Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Voyager Cataloging Tile Cdt Record Display Options Window Ilelp Sa A Jwa AeA 48 amp Ss 6 Open Save Search Headings Titles Saveto DB New Hidgs GetHidgs New terms Get tems Hierarchy Aull 29449 S
167. e taken to suit your library s preferences or requirements Contact Information To contact Endeavor Information Systems Inc use the following numbers North America Corporate Headquarters Endeavor Information Systems Inc 2200 E Devon Avenue Suite 382 Des Plaines IL 60018 4505 United States 800 762 6300 toll free from within N America only info endinfosys com International Customers Phone 800 4444 3474 You must first dial the US access code for example 00 for the Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page XXX February 2004 Voyager with Unicode About This Document United Kingdom and New Zealand 0011 for Australia then the number listed above You do not need to put a 1 in front of the 800 number European Office Endeavor Information Systems Inc Harcourt Place 32 Jamestown Road Camden London NW1 7BY 44 0 20 7424 4400 Voice 44 0 20 7424 4409 Fax info europe endinfosys com E Mail Australian Office Endeavor Information Systems Inc Suite 129 85 Grattan Street Carlton Vic 3053 Australia 08 8336 9474 Voice from within Australia 61 8 8336 9474 Voice from outside Australia 61 3 9349 4099 Fax info austnz endinfosys com E Mail Document Reproduction Photocopying Photocopying the documentation is allowed under your contract with Endeavor Information Systems It is stated below All documentation is subject to U S copyright protecti
168. e the items if there are more than one For any of the following activities click the Clear button to unselect all of the selected items Each item s location is designated as a permanent location or a temporary location A permanent location is indicated by a capital P in parentheses P after the location name A temporary location is indicated by a capital T in parentheses T after the location name To open the item record s highlight the Item record s that you want to view or double click an Item record and click OK Click Cancel to close the dialog box without retrieving any records To open the holdings record highlight the appropriate Item record and click the View Holdings button To resequence the items perform the following steps Resequencing items allows you to determine in which order items display in other modules a Highlight the item s you want to resequence Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Click the Move Before button cursor changes to an up arrow or the Move After button cursor changes to a down arrow depending on where you want to move the item Click Cancel Move to cancel the move without resequencing the items Point to and click the item you want to move the other item s before or after The items are resequenced If you want this order to display every time this
169. ead only Z Figure 5 11 Select Bibliographic Template dialog box no default Template folder 5 Select the Catalog folder and click the Open button or double click the Catalog folder There are three standard folders within the Catalog folder They are MARCTemplate Tag Tables and Template NOTE The default bibliographic holdings and authority templates are located in the Template folder You can save any new templates that you create to that folder but it is not required If you are sharing templates among coworkers you could create a Template folder on a network that everyone can access 6 Select the Template folder and click the Open button or double click the Template folder Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 21 Result The Select Bibliographic Template dialog box displays a list of template files If you have defined a Template folder on the Folders Files tab and you click the ellipsis button for a template the Select Bibliographic Template dialog box defaults directly to that folder Look in fa Template a cl la component773 tem a Auth 100 tem ja Hold tem ia Auth 110 tem ja HoldM tem a AuthM tem a prectem fa Bib tem fa Biblv tem Files of type Template tern x Cancel I Open as read only Z Figure 5 12 Template files in the Template folder 7 Select the template
170. eavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 10 16 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Session Defaults and Preferences F i General Validation Work Flow Item Defaults Folders Files Mapping Colors Fonts m MARC Views variable fields Record Hierarchy Bibliographic Sample Bibliographic Sample Holdings Sample Holdings Sample ta Sample Bound wit Sample Authority Sample Conversion Sample Global Heading Change Hierarchy Row Marker Symbol gt Level 1 Old Heading Sample m Font Level 2 New Heading Sample Name faaan Level 3 Auth Heading Sample Size E Bold J _Level3 Auth Heading Cancel Figure 10 8 Session Defaults Colors Font tab The procedure for changing colors and fonts is shown in Procedure 10 1 Changing Colors and Fonts on page 10 17 Procedure 10 1 Changing Colors and Fonts Use the following to change colors and fonts 1 Click the button for the type of record to which you want to change the color Your choices are the following see Table 10 7 Table 10 7 Record types available for color change Color Fonts Tab Dialog Box Group Record Type MARC views variable fields e Bibliographic e Holdings e Authority e Conversion Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with
171. eavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page xii February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Figures 3 7 Dialog box for creating a Holdings record from an open Bibliographic record when one already exists 3 7 3 8 Create Item Button 3 8 3 9 Open Record from Work Folder Button 3 9 3 10 Hierarchy Button 3 10 3 11 Holdings and Items for Bibliographic Records 3 11 3 12 Select Import File dialog box 3 13 3 13 Selecting a record to import 3 13 3 14 Search dialog box 3 15 3 15 Voyager Connection Options dialog box 3 16 3 16 Selecting databases to search 3 19 3 17 Remote Search dialog box 3 20 3 18 Search Status dialog box 3 21 3 19 Titles Index dialog box 3 22 3 20 Record imported from another database 3 23 3 21 File Documents dialog box in ImageServer 3 26 3 22 New Bibliographic Record in Cataloging 3 27 3 23 Search dialog box 3 28 3 24 Search dialog box with user defined alternate search button 3 29 3 25 Keyword tab of the Search dialog box 3 31 3 26 Titles Index dialog box 3 32 3 27 Titles Index Button 3 33 3 28 Stop button seen with more than 100 search results 3 33 3 29 Completed Keyword tab 3 35 3 30 Titles Index dialog box after performing a free text keyword search 3 35 3 31 MARC tab of the selected title 3 36 3 32 Non Keyword tab 3 37 3 33 Search results after doing find subject heading search for war 3 39 3 34 Search results after doing a subject heading search for war 3 39 3 35 Head
172. ed Limit Type column Type of limit selected Value Value of the limit selected For example if a language limit is applied English is a possible value Add button Applies the limit selected in the top portion of the dialog box and displays in the bottom portion of the dialog box Delete button Clear button Retain search limits between searches Deletes the selected limit from the bottom half of the dialog box Clears the selected limit from the top half of the dialog box Applies the limit s to the current search and all future searches OK button When clicked the system returns to the Search dialog box and the search limits defined are in effect A IMPORTANT You cannot limit Subject Author or Call Number Headings Searches Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 55 The procedure for setting search limits is shown in Procedure 3 11 Setting Search Limits on page 3 56 Procedure 3 11 Setting Search Limits Use the following to set search limits 1 Click the Limit button to limit your search Result The Search Limits dialog box opens see Figure 3 51 Search Limits amp Location amp Date amp Medium amp Type amp Place amp Status z Limit Type Add Delete Clear J Retain search limits between searches Figure 3 51 Search Limits dialog bo
173. ed responses are displayed in constant width italic type Keyboard commands such as Ctrl and Enter are displayed in bold Required keyboard input such as Enter vi is displayed in constant width bold type Place holders for variable portions of user defined input such as 1s 1 filename are displayed in italicized constant width boldtype The names of menus or status display pages and required selections from menus or status display pages such as From the Applications drop down menu select System wide are displayed in bold type Object names on a window s interface such as the Description field the OK button and the Metadata tab are displayed in bold type The titles of documents such as ENCompass Web Client User s Guide are displayed in italic type Caution and important notices are displayed with a distinctive label such as the following Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xxix NOTE Extra information pertinent to the topic A IMPORTANT Information you should consider before making a decision or configuration A CAUTION Information you must consider before making a decision due to potential loss of data or system malfunction involved ae TIP Helpful hints you might want to consider before making a decision RECOMMENDED Preferred course of action OPTIONAL Indicates course of action which is not required but may b
174. eed the proper security level When saving a record to the database Cataloging first validates the record against the MARC tag tables see MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 and the Authority records see Authority Control on page 9 1 Cataloging then checks for duplicate records A confirmation message displays upon the successful saving of the record If you want to save the records in your current session to the database without running MARC or Authority Control Validation you can change the settings on the Validation tab in your Session Defaults and Preferences see Validation Tab Figure 10 2 on page 10 4 If you do not want a confirmation message to display upon the successful saving of a record to the database you can change the Suppress confirmation message upon successful save option on the Work Flow tab in your Session Defaults and Preferences see Work Flow Tab Figure 10 4 on page 10 8 NOTE Before you can save a holdings record to the database you must define the 852 subfield b with a valid location code as defined in System Administration and assigned to the appropriate Cataloging Policy and Cataloging Security Profile Once a holdings record is saved to the database the title of the associated bibliographic record is displayed on the title bar of the holdings record and on the BibTitle s tab When an existing record with a record status of new such as when the Bibliographic Leader is set to n is edited and saved to
175. een by selecting Record gt Save to Database and to Local File You can also choose to save to the database and to a file and then to close the record once it has been saved by selecting Record gt Save to Database and to Local File and Close When Save to Database and to Local File is selected the bib is first saved to the database according to all of the rules regarding saving to the database see above for more information Then if the save is successful it is converted to the character set format specified for that file and then saved to a local file If there is no filename entered in Session Preferences the Save to Database and to Local File option will be disabled For more information see Folders Files Tab Figure 10 6 on page 10 12 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information NOTE If the record is saved to the database but is not successfully saved to the local file a warning message will be displayed but the record in the database will remain in its updated form Validating a Bib Heading You can validate a heading manually A validated heading is one that matches an authority heading in the database Any row that contains a tag that is under Authority Control can be checked to see if it matches an Authority Heading You can select Record gt Validate Heading to check whether it is valid This will validate the headin
176. emporary Location Mo Chance x Claims Returned I Clear All Damaged In Process Permanent Type No Chance X In Transit P Delete Item Temporary Type No Chance bd Media Type No Chance jai Figure 7 5 Item Status Clear All single step Especially noteworthy is the Clear All option for Item Status and Statistical Categories The Clear All option allows operators to clear any current non system applied status or statistical category and apply a new one in a single step See Figure 7 5 Also notice that the Item Status drop down list is only composed of non system applied statuses Itis not possible for example to remove a Charged status from an item The Item Status List includes e At Bindery e Cataloging Review e Circulation Review Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 7 5 e Damaged e In Process e In Transit e Lost Library Applied e Missing e Withdrawn Pick And Scan Item Options Items Selent File Barcode IJ SS al Pracess He Engst Baye ta ale Figure 7 6 Items tab 3 Click the Items tab See Figure 7 6 4 Enter the identifying item information in the Barcode text box or the name of the file in Select File to process a batch of items 5 Click the check mark button or press Enter to process individual Barcode entries in the Barcode text box or click the Process File button to begin batch processing
177. ents Special Character Mode 6 3 Special Character Mode Mapping 6 3 Special Characters cfg 6 7 File Contents 6 7 First Field 6 7 Second Field 6 8 Third Field 6 8 Microsoft Character Map 6 8 Regional Options for Non Roman Characters 6 8 Importing Records with Non Roman Characters 6 9 Other Diacritic Considerations 6 9 De 7 Pick and Scan Introduction 7 1 Using Pick and Scan 7 2 i 8 Templates Introduction 8 1 Creating Editing and Deleting Templates 8 2 D 9 Authority Control Introduction 9 1 Columns on the Authority Validation Dialog Box 9 2 Buttons on the Authority Validation Dialog Box 9 4 Global Headings Change and Preview Queue 9 5 Sample Global Headings Change Work Flow 9 8 Global Change Process 9 9 Splitting a Heading 9 13 Heading Merge 9 14 Name Title Heading Change 9 14 Buttons 9 14 Global Headings Batch Job 9 15 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page viii February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Contents 10 Session Defaults and Menu Options e Session Defaults and Preferences 10 1 General Tab 10 2 Validation Tab Figure 10 2 10 4 Work Flow Tab Figure 10 4 10 8 Item Defaults Tab Figure 10 5 10 10 Folders Files Tab Figure 10 6 10 12 Mapping Tab Figure 10 7 10 14 Colors Fonts Tab Figure 10 8 10 16 e Cataloging Menus 10 19 File Menu 10 19 Edit Menu 10 20 Record Menu 10 22 Item Menu 10 23 Display Menu 10 24 Options Menu 10 24 Window Menu 10 24 Help Menu 10 2
178. er or not the record is OK to be exported YES NO the date on which OK to export should take effect the date on which OK to export was last set the operator who set the record as OK to export and the location at which OK to export was set OK to Export Option The OK to export check box is for libraries that export records You can confirm that the record is acceptable for export by checking the box You must click the Save to Database button for changes to take effect If the OK to export box is Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 34 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating already checked that indicates that an operator has either approved the record for export at an earlier date or the record was automatically authorized for export when it was imported it To automatically mark records as OK to export see the Bulk Export of MARC Records section of the Voyager Technical User s Guide When the OK to export box is checked two radio buttons become active on the System tab allowing you to either select the last date on which the OK to export option was set or to select today s date Change to Today radio button If you select Change to Today and then click the Save to Database button the OK to export date will change to today s date NOTE The OK to export option resets during the actual export process The date operator and location at which the OK to export opt
179. erged according to the profile selected When you save a record to the database for the first time a number is assigned to that record by the system This record ID displays in the title bar of that record If you do merge or replace one of the records in the database with the incoming record the old record is written to a replace file called replace lt record type gt marc which is located in the rpt directory When you save a bibliographic record to the database from a work folder the record in the work folder is automatically deleted unless you have Delete records from work files once saved to database unselected in Session Defaults Voyager checks for duplicate records according to the Authority and Bibliographic Import Replace profile menus set in Session Defaults For more information see General Tab on page 10 2 Anytime the system is performing tasks that update the bibliographic tables you are unable to update or delete records until the system is finished processing While processing the system displays The Catalog is in read only mode You are not allowed to update delete any bibliographic records at this time Saving to 4 10 the Database and to a File Simultaneously You can also save a record to the database and to a file simultaneously This allows you to avoid having to do a regular Save and then a Save to Database as well You can choose to save to the database and to a file and keep the record open onscr
180. es 2 64 Use the following to assign a statistical category to an item Select Item gt View Statistics The Item Statistical Categories dialog box opens see Figure 2 48 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Item Statistical Categories J 411200702912 Statistical Categories Date Applied Statistical Categories List Figure 2 48 Item Statistical Categories dialog box There are two areas displayed for category information the actual applied Statistical Category box and the Statistical Categories List which contain the possible categories The number which displays at the top of the dialog box is the barcode assigned to the current item 2 To apply a statistical category select the appropriate category from the Statistical Categories List and click the blue up arrow see Figure 2 49 The category displays in the Statistical Categories box Once a category is applied to an item it is no longer available in the Statistical Categories List m Figure 2 49 Blue Up and Red Down Buttons To delete the category highlight the appropriate category in Statistical Categories box and click the red down arrow see Figure 2 49 The status returns to the Statistical Categories List 3 Click the OK button to save the statistical categories that you have added or deleted and close the Item Statistical Cate
181. es a list of values for these numbers and inserts them into the drop down list The values on either side can be positive or negative and can go in ascending or descending order However they must be whole integer values from 32 768 through 32 767 The left side of the tilde gets displayed first and the right gets displayed last Input the numerical range of 001 to 999 for running time as 001 999 Running time NOTE The tilde character is used in the key portion of the drop down menu stanzas to expand a numerical range in the drop down menu instead of typing out the entire range Using this value in the key of a drop down menu stanza especially with non numerical data can have unpredictable results Avoid using it in this way Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 23 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page A 24 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Voyager Call Number Logic Processing Call Number Indexing In Voyager 2001 1 call number functionality is expanded to provide greater flexibility with different classification schemes the rules used to determine how call numbers are indexed Voyager is enhanced to recognize and store 852 information specified with a first indicator of 7 and an associated code in subfield 2 2 This enhancement applies to both online and bulk call number entry and update for specific 2 codes Voyage
182. es upgrading to Voyager 2001 1 and currently using the UDC Old Yale or Cambridge classification schemes a call number index regeneration is required Call Number Sorting and Searching There are two aspects to sorting and searching by call number that are of significance relative to Voyager s processing logic e How the data is interpreted and stored when input to a Voyager database How records are saved e How the search text is processed and results displayed for a call number search how users search How the data is stored normalized determines how it can be sorted and search results are affected not only by how the data is stored but also by how the search text is processed Call Number Input Normalization Process Records Saved When a call number is entered into the database Voyager evaluates what type of call number it is such as LC Dewey Decimal National Library of Medicine Cambridge Main and so on Once this type is determined Voyager uses a corresponding classification scheme see Table B 1 Table B 2 and Table B 3 that contains the rules used for normalizing the call number The process of Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode B 3 normalizing the call number formats the call number so that Voyager can more accurately search and sort call numbers For example alpha characters are stored in their uppercase format to insure consistency in sorti
183. escriptions 2 35 2 6 History Tab Field Descriptions 2 54 2 7 Item Record Header Information 2 58 2 8 Item Record Location Options 2 58 2 9 Item Record Holdings Options 2 58 2 10 Item Record Detail Options 2 59 2 11 Possible Statuses Listed According to Rank 2 60 Saaz 3 Creating Opening and Viewing Records 3 1 Description of Column Headings for Import Record List 3 14 3 2 Function Key Options for Creating Bibliographic Records 3 25 3 3 Keyword tab selections 3 31 3 4 Titles Index list box 3 33 3 5 Non Keyword tab 3 37 3 6 Headings List dialog box 3 42 3 7 Authorized Reference Auth Ref and Note Descriptions 3 44 3 8 Builder tab 3 50 3 9 Search Limits dialog box 3 55 3 10 Voyager Connection Options dialog box sections and fields 3 61 3 11 Page references for bibliographic search types 3 64 3 12 Retrieve Options Using Record Menu 3 75 fet 4 Changing Saving and Printing Information 4 1 Character Changes 4 2 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xix Tables 4 2 Default Text in Print Labels Dialog Box Bibliographic Record 4 16 4 3 Default Text in Print Labels Dialog Box Holdings 4 16 4 4 Default Text in Print Labels Dialog Box Item Record 4 16 4 5 Action codes descriptions 4 19 4 6 Generic Field Codes 100 Series 4 22 4 7 Bibliographic Field Codes 200 Series 4 22 4 8 Holdings Field Codes 300 Series 4 22 4 9 Item Field Codes
184. esults in only one title option is set in Options gt Preferences If the system finds more that one related record a dialog box opens listing all related records You can choose one or more titles from the list to display In the Cataloging module you can quickly create new related records from a source record using templates New functionality has been added to traditional templates in order to map tag subfield information from a source record into a target record See Templates for general template information If you are already familiar with creating and editing templates see MARC Record Derivation Using Cataloging Templates on page 5 8 Templates A cataloging template allows you to use a pre defined MARC record to easily create new records Before you can create a record there must be at least one template in the template folder of the Voyager directory Voyager provides you with three templates bib tem auth tem and hold tem typically located in c voyager catalog templates These templates should not be deleted NOTE Templates cannot be retroactively applied to an existing record You must have at least one template for each type of record that you want to create for example bib tem auth tem hold tem The procedure for creating a new template is shown in Procedure 5 1 Creating a New Template on page 5 5 Procedure 5 1 Creating a New Template Use the following to create a new template Select File gt Tem
185. et validation List all the errors Select this option to display a list of all the errors resulting from the MARC validation This option is used in combination with Bypass MARC Validation Show errors one at a time Select this option to display each error individually that results from the MARC validation This option is used in combination with Bypass MARC Validation Bypass Authority Control Validation Selected this option to stop the validation of records against the authority records when you save to the database When this option is not selected only the heading types selected in the Heading Types group box undergo authority validation Bypass Decomposition of accented characters for MARC21 Select this option to prevent the decomposition of characters for MARC21 Leave this option unchecked for MARC21 compliance Some non Voyager data entry methods may utilize composed characters characters that store two component parts diacritic and alphabetic character as a single character with its own unique internal value such as when using a non U S keyboard For MARC21 compliance characters with diacritics must be stored as two separate component pieces See Diacritics and MARC21 Compliance Considerations on page C 3 for more information This feature addresses this issue Display all the headings Select this option to have any of the heading types display in the Authority Validation dialog box a
186. ew and manipulate it in standard Acquisitions fashion See the Voyager Acquisitions User s Guide for details on line items NOTE If you have not established at least view only access to line items in Acquisitions in the System Administration module for the operator s using the Acq in the Cat function the View Line Items in Acquisitions menu option will be grayed out See 3 69 for more information on setting at least view only access to line items in Acquisitions A Single Line Item If there is one line item associated with the record you opened selecting Record gt View Line Items in Acquisitons or Ctrl M will cause the Acquisitions client to display with the record s associated line item Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records NOTE Line items are directly associated with bibliographic records as opposed to holdings records in Voyager Thus using Acq in the Cat from a holdings record will cause the line item to display that is associated with the holdings record s related bibliographic record This is because holdings and bibliographic records are linked in the Voyager system fig Line Item Abnormal behavior John Altrocchi under the general editorship of Jerome Kagan Figure 3 67 Line item that displays in the Acquisitons module Multiple Line Items If more than one line item is associa
187. exists Copy This copies the selected Heading text to the clipboard To activate the Copy button you must first select the error in the Authority Validation dialog by clicking the row label the grey left column You can then paste the Heading into the new authority record using Edit gt Paste or the Ctrl v function Search This button allows you to search for authority headings using the standard Search dialog A browse search is launched with the search argument being the selected heading If you select a heading from the browse list and click Copy the heading is copied to the clipboard You can then return to the record and add the heading infor mation by selecting a point in the variable field and click ing Paste NOTE If the heading selected is a subdivision the search performed is a regular find search rather than a browse Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 9 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Authority Control Table 9 2 Authority Validation Dialog Box Button Description Continue This overrides all of the authority validation errors and allows Voyager to save the record to the database This button does not create authority records for the unautho rized headings Close This button closes the Authority Validation dialog box Global Headings Change and Preview Queue An authority record the 100 185 fields contains an e
188. eyboard Equivalent Script l lt space gt Polish L Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 6 3 Table 6 1 Special Character Mode Mapping Diacritic amp Non Roman Characters Description sa en E Keyboard Equivalent Scandinavian O D with Crossbar Icelandic Thorn p AE Digraph OE Digraph amp Miagkii Znak Dot at Midline Musical Flat b Patent Mark Plus or Minus O Hook fe U Hook U Alif alpha a Ayn i 0 Polish t 1 Scandinavian o 2 d with Crossbar d 3 Icelandic thorn p 4 ae Digraph 5 oe Digraph 6 Tverdii Znak 7 Turkish i 1 8 British Pound 9 eth 6 Dagger t o Hook 0 lt u Hook U Beta B gt Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 6 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Diacritics and Non Roman Characters Table 6 1 Special Character Mode Mapping Diacritic amp Non Roman Characters Description Diacritic Non Roman Character Keyboard Equivalent Gamma Superscript 0 Superscript 1 Superscript 2 Superscript 3 Superscript 4 Superscript 5 Superscript 6 Superscript 7 Superscript 8 I 7 m o 0 w gt Ee Superscript 9 Koj Superscript
189. fa a Amarc6xx cfa a Amarczxx cf a Amarc8xx cfg a Amarcfix cfa a BmarcOxx ctq a Bmarc1xx cfg a Bmarc2xx cfq 2 Bmare3xx cfq A Bmarc4xx ctq BmarcSxx cfq A Bmarc xx cfq a Bmarc 7xx cfq A Bmarc8xx cfq a Bmarc9xx cfq a Bmarcfix ctg a HmarcOxx cfg Figure A 2 Various configuration files tag tables in the MARC21 directory In the OCLC RLIN and MARC21 directories all the files that begin with the letter A pertain to authority records all the files that begin with the letter B pertain to bibliographic records and all the files that begin with the letter H pertain to holdings records After the letters A B or H each of the filenames includes the word marc followed by a number and an xx The number and xx indicate the field range to which the file pertains For example Amarc3xx cfg pertains to authority record fields in the 300 range and Hmarc2xx cfg pertains to holdings record fields in the 200 range Filenames that do not include a number but include the word fix pertain to the fixed fields including Leader fields for the particular record type For example Bmarcfix cfg pertains to bibliographic record fixed fields In the OCLC RLIN and MARC21 directories there is a file called master cfg This file provides a high level outline of the fields included in authority bibliographic and holdings records for each one s tag table format Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first
190. fied in the System Administration Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 65 module If you are searching only remote databases the Titles Index displays records in the sort order specified for the first database in the Voyager Connection Options dialog box See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details on sort order NOTE For simultaneous searches the Titles Index list box contains a Status button and a Database column The Status button opens the Search Status dialog box of the last search The Database column lists the name of the database as established in the System Administration module 7 From the Titles Index list box to select one or more items click the row s containing the item s 8 Use one or more of the following buttons to continue and complete the search Use to OK add the item s you selected to the purchase order close the Titles Index list box and view the line item s in the Purchase Order dialog box Cancel cancel the search and close the Titles Index dialog box Search close the Titles Index list box and return to a new Search dialog box Status open the Search Status dialog box of the last search Refresh refresh the index in the event that records were updated in the Cataloging module Select All select all of the records in the search results list Clear All de select all selected records NOTE
191. file you want to use and click the Open button or double click the template file Result The path to the file automatically displays in the Bib field in the Templates section m Templates Bib c Woyager catalog template sbi Hida Auth Figure 5 13 Bib template selected on Folders Files tab 8 Click the OK button to close the Session Defaults and Preferences dialog box and save your changes Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 5 22 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking NOTE A file path can only be specified in the Templates section if there is one template as opposed to multiple templates defined for each record type See Procedure 5 6 Creating New Records Using Templates on page 5 25 to learn how to use default templates when creating new MARC records In the Folders section you can enter or select a default Template folder so when you want to edit an existing template the Open Template File dialog box defaults to the specified folder Also if you specify a default Template folder any new templates that you create are saved to that folder The procedure for defining a default folder is shown in Procedure 5 5 Defining a Default Folder on page 5 23 Procedure 5 5 Defining a Default Folder Use the following to define a default folder Open the Cataloging module Select Options gt P
192. first page C 6 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Voyager with Unicode Considerations Table C 3 Code Page Numbering Code Page Number Description Latin text with ALA diacritics CJK characters the EACC set Arabic Cyrillic Greek Hebrew QO oO A WwW NH gt MARC 8 Greek characters alpha beta gamma Logged as a loose translation MARC 8 superscript and subscript numbers Logged as a loose translation Table C 4 Specific Warnings amp Errors Warning Error Description loose char This is a warning This indicates that a character that is not strictly part of the Voyager encoding has been converted Carriage returns line feeds and MARC 8 superscript and subscript numbers are some examples of characters that are converted and raise this warning no char to combine to This is a warning This indicates that a Voyager encoding combining character was stored at the end of a subfield where it lacks a base character to combine to In this case the conversion places a space preceding the combining character in the converted record undefined char This is an error This error occurs when the converter encounters data in the source record that cannot be mapped to Unicode The specific characters that cannot be mapped differ from code page to code page Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first
193. for Displaying a Record Web Server http POST Viewing and Editing Line Items Acquisitions in Cataloging System Administration Setup Retrieving Records Associated with Other Records Viewing Holdings Locations Linking and Unlinking Records Link Item to Bib Relink an Item to a Different Holdings Unlinking Holdings and Bib Records Copying an Item Record from an Existing Item Record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 49 3 53 3 54 3 58 3 67 3 68 3 69 3 75 3 79 3 80 3 80 3 81 3 82 3 83 Creating Opening and Viewing Records Creating and Opening Records This section describes creating and working with records in the Cataloging module Creating a Record Before you can create a record there must be at least one template for the type of record that you want to create in the Cataloging folder of the Voyager directory The Cataloging client comes installed with the following templates e bib tem e auth tem hldg tem For information on creating your own templates see Creating a New Template on page 8 2 This section describe how to create new records for the following e Authority Bibliographic entries See Procedure 3 1 Creating a New Record on page 3 2 e Holdings when a bibliographic record is open See Procedure 3 2 Creating a Holdings Record When a Bibliographic Record is Open on page 3 5 Endeavor
194. g outlined Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 9 11 Table 9 4 Original Heading Information Displayed Column Description Auth ID The authority record ID of the changed heading Heading old The original heading for the record Operator The operator who made the change Date The date the change was made Index Type The type of heading index Proposed New Heading The next thing that displays below the old heading is the new heading See Figure 9 7 and Table 9 5 This displays the complete new heading as it will look after the changes have been made You must check the box to the left of the new heading in order to make the change There may be more than one proposed new heading such as when a subdivision is changed mammasini Amateur theater 5XX 48715 Arena theater 5XX 50234 Children s plays l 5XX 50849 Community theater 5XX 52592 Expert mental theater Delete sal apace Figure 9 7 Level Two of Tree Proposed New Heading outlined Table 9 5 Proposed New Heading Information Displayed Column Description Process You can instruct the batch job to process the change by either clicking the check box or selecting the heading and clicking the Process button Heading new The proposed new heading Bibs The number of bibliographic records containing the old heading Endeavor Informatio
195. g Information The alternate font is specified after the AlternateFont variable and the alternate font size is specified after the AlternateFontSize variable Both of these display inthe Print Options XXX stanza for that type of record If you have chosen your alternate font as a barcode font you may need to printa few lines of blank space beneath the information that is to be printed with the barcode font to ensure that the barcode does not overlap with the information beneath it Enter the backslash action code on a line by itself to print a blank line NOTE The barcode font that is included with Voyager is called Barcode 3 of 9 If you use this font as your alternate font and your scanning device requires start stop characters you must put an asterisk on both sides of the field that is to be printed with the alternate font in order for your scanner to read the barcode after it is printed For example if you want to print the item barcode field in the alternate font and you have selected as your alternate font Barcode 3 of 9 you enter A F401 a NOTE If you are using this barcode font and you make it print bold B A F401 a b the barcode height will print taller and the digits normally beneath the barcode will not be visible if you are using the barcode font and you make it print italic I A F401 a i the barcode height will print shorter If you chose to use a different barcode font you should read the d
196. g in the selected row You can also access Heading Validation by performing a right click of the mouse in the selection column of the grid in the MARC view form From the menu that displays click Validate Heading in this Field The procedure for validating a heading is shown in Procedure 4 6 Validating a Heading on page 4 11 NOTE While Validate Heading is only performed on a single row performing Cut Copy and Delete from this menu operates on all selected rows When a menu option does not apply it is not displayed Procedure 4 6 Validating a Heading Use the following to validate a heading From an open bibliographic record select the row you want to check by clicking in the fixed column the empty box to the left of the Tag row Result This highlights the row and displays the arrow in the fixed column Select Record gt Validate Heading from the main menu or right click in the fixed column and select Validate Heading in this Field Result If the field is a valid Authority heading a dialog box opens with This heading is valid 3 Click OK to return to the Bibliographic record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 11 Result If the field is not a valid Authority heading the Headings Index displays 4 Browse through the Headings Index until you find the appropriate heading Select the heading and click Replace Result This copies the
197. ger with Unicode 2 13 3 Click OK or Cancel Result This saves your work and exits the 008 dialog box or exits the dialog box without saving Variable Fields 2 14 The variable fields grid allows you to add tags with first and second indicators and bibliographic data subfields The grid is made up of rows which store information about each tag Each row is broken into segments for the tag two indicators and the variable subfield text When you create a bibliographic record a grid template is supplied by the system and provides the required title statement 245 tag row See Figure 2 13 z New Bib Record mozi H System of Tag M 12 Subfield Data Figure 2 13 Variable fields grid with 245 tag row 880 Fields and Unicode Implementation Voyager supports the creation and editing of bibliographic 880 Alternate Graphic Representations fields in Cataloging For more information about the support of non Roman characters and Unicode see Chapter 6 Diacritics and Non Roman Characters on page 6 1 and Appendix C Voyager with Unicode Considerations on page C 1 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Adding and Editing Variable Fields There are several features that are common to adding and editing variable fields Right click the selection column containing the row marker of the grid on the MARC ta
198. gged into modules with different User IDs and Passwords Example of a bib record opened for using Acq in the Cat Line item that displays in the Acquisitons module Dialog box for multiple line item matches in Acquisitions Message associated line items do not exist Retrieve Holdings Button Retrieve Holdings dialog box Select one or more authority records dialog box Retrieve Items Button Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page xiv February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 46 3 46 3 47 3 47 3 48 3 49 3 51 3 52 3 53 3 55 3 56 3 57 3 57 3 58 3 59 3 60 3 62 3 63 3 63 3 65 3 65 3 68 3 70 3 71 3 71 3 72 3 73 3 74 3 74 3 76 3 76 3 77 3 78 Figures 3 74 Retrieve Items dialog box 3 78 3 75 Show holdings Valid MARC Values dialog box 3 79 3 76 Link the item to a bibliographic record dialog box 3 80 3 77 Relink the item to a holding record dialog box 3 81 es 4 Changing Saving and Printing Information 4 1 Save Button 4 6 4 2 Update record alert dialog box 4 6 4 3 Save to Database button 4 7 4 4 Bibliographic Dedupe Detection dialog box 4 9 4 5 Print Labels dialog box 4 15 4 6 Description of options in the Print Options Bibliographic stanza 4 18 4 7 Sample Print Template Spine XXX stanza 4 18 4 8 Sample Print Template Piece XXX stanza 4 19 4 9 Sample label print template file 4 25 5 Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking 5 1 Related Recor
199. ging module and also gives a list of options available through the menus at the top of the Cataloging window MARC Tag Tables Appendix A contains information on viewing using and configuring the MARC tag tables used by the Cataloging client Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode About This Document Appendix B Appendix C Index Voyager Call Number Logic Processing Appendix B contains information on using different classification schemes with the Cataloging module Voyager with Unicode Considerations Appendix C contains information regarding considerations relative to the Voyager with Unicode implementation The Index is an alphabetical detailed cross reference of topics about which this document contains information Conventions Used in This Document The following conventions are used throughout this document Names of commands variables stanzas files and paths such as dev tmp as well as selectors and typed user input are displayed in constant width type Commands or other keyboard input that must be typed exactly as presented are displayed in constant width bold type Commands or other keyboard input that must be supplied by the user are displayed in constant width bold italic type System generated responses such as error messages are displayed in constant width type Variable portions of system generat
200. gories dialog box Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 65 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 66 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Contents Creating and Opening Records 3 1 e Creating a Record 3 1 e Opening a Record 3 8 From a Work Folder 3 8 From the OPAC 3 10 e Bibliographic Tree 3 10 e Importing Records 3 11 Importing Records From a File 3 12 Importing Records From Another Database 3 15 Invalid Records 3 24 Accessing Replaced or Deleted Files 3 24 e Creating New Bibliographic Records from Image Server 3 25 Viewing Information 3 27 Search Dialog Box 3 28 e Remote Searching 3 29 e User Defined Alternate Search Button 3 29 e Setting Search Preferences 3 30 Retain Last Search 3 30 Automatic Truncation for Non Keyword Searches 3 30 e Keyword Tab and Keyword Searching 3 30 e Keyword Search Results The Titles Index 3 32 e Non Keyword Tab and Heading and Non Keyword Left Anchored Searching 3 36 Find and Browse Searches 3 38 Heading Searches by Call Number 3 40 e Non Keyword Search Results Headings List 3 40 Reference Information Dialog Box 3 43 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 i Contents 3 ii Builder Tab and Builder Searching History tab Search Limits Remote Databases Additional Options
201. graphic 007 Fixed Field 2 9 Bibliographic 008 Fixed Field 2 12 Variable Fields 2 14 Adding and Editing Variable Fields 2 15 Deleting Variable Fields 2 18 Displaying Attachments 856 Links and Tables of Contents in WebVoy ge 2 20 Attachments 2 20 856 Field Links 2 20 Table of Contents 2 24 System Tab 2 24 OK to Export Option 2 25 Suppress from OPAC Option 2 26 History Tab 2 26 Sorting the columns 2 27 Lag Time 2 27 Viewing and Editing Line Items from Bibliographic Records 2 28 e Authority Records 2 28 MARC Tab 2 28 Authority Leader 2 29 Authority 008 Fixed Field 2 31 Variable Fields 2 33 System Tab 2 34 OK to Export Option 2 34 History Tab 2 35 Sorting the columns 2 36 Lag Time 2 36 e Holdings Records 2 36 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page iv February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Contents MARC Tab 2 37 Holdings Leader 2 38 Holdings 007 Fixed Field 2 39 Holdings 008 Fixed Field 2 42 Variable Fields 2 44 Get Call Number from Bib Record 2 45 System Tab 2 51 OK to Export Option 2 52 Suppress from OPAC Option 2 53 Bib Title s Tab 2 53 History Tab 2 54 Sorting the columns 2 55 Lag Time 2 55 Viewing and Editing Line Items from Holdings Records 2 55 e Item Records 2 56 Checking for Duplicate Barcodes 2 57 Header Information 2 58 Location and Type 2 58 Item Holdings 2 58 Item Details 2 59 Statuses 2 60 Statistical Categories 2 64 EE SSe 3 Creating Opening and Viewing Records
202. h includes the tag subfield and derivation field 773 nn x lt 022a gt the system creates the new record in the following manner Reads the derivation field lt 022a gt in the template Checks the active source record for an 022 tag subfield a If an 022 tag is present in the source record and subfield a contains data the systems adds a 773 tag to the new target record and maps the data in the 022 ta to the 773 tx If an 022 tag is present in the source record but subfield a is not present or the 022 tag is not present in the source record the system does not consider this a match When a derivation field using this format does not match anything in the source record the system adds a 773 x to the new record but leaves the subfield empty For example if the number 1234 5678 appears in the 022 ta of the source record the system maps that number into the 773 x of the new target record That is 773 nn x 1234 5678 The system acts differently if the second derivation field format is used For example if the tag subfield and derivation field 773 nn lt tx 022a gt is added to a template the system creates a new record in the following manner Reads the derivation field lt x 022a gt in the template Checks the active source record for an 022 tag subfield a If an 022 tag is present in the source record and subfield a contains data the systems adds a 773 tag to the new target record and maps the dat
203. h is used to pull call Hierarchies number information from a bib record into a holdings record You can also select None from the list of options Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 10 2 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Table 10 1 General tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Bibliographic Import Replace Profile Select the appropriate Import Replace profile from this drop down menu These profiles are defined by your system administrator and specify what actions are taken when duplicate records are found during an import If your profile removes records that are currently in the database and replaces them with the imported record or merges the existing record with a new record the old records are archived on the server in the file replace lt recordtype gt marc If your profile does not replace records that are currently in the database the imported duplicate records are archived on the server in the file discard lt recordtype gt marc Records rejected because they don t match are archived in the file reject lt recordtype gt marc To access the deleted and discarded files on the server or for more information on specific profiles refer to Bibliographic Duplicate Detection Profiles in the Voyager System Administration User s Guide Authority Import Replace Profile Select the appropria
204. had the record open Voyager displays an Update Record Alert message Figure 4 2 This alert is activated for changes made to any record types except for item records Changes to item records do not set off this alert Voyager Cataloging This record has been updated by demo at 1123 98 04 50 PM View the current version before saving No will save your version and overlay the previous updates No Cancel Figure 4 2 Update record alert dialog box If there have been changes made the following three options are available e To save your changes over the changes in the database the No button e To cancel your changes and preserve what is already in the database the Cancel button Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 4 6 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Save As Saving and Printing Information e To view the record in the database the Yes button In that case you will be able to view the current database version of the record and combine the information into your record to your satisfaction and then save the final version of your record back to the database You can save a record to a work folder a file at a different location by selecting File gt Save As When you select Save As Voyager saves the record to a new location and or with a new name If the record was opened from a work folder you can use Save As to save the record in the f
205. hakespeare Willian 1564 1616 Curiulanus 15 x MARC System History Leader fo0430cz 2200121n 4500 oog fissso123000000 0 og fesiti n _acannaabl aaa ae eS Tag 14 12 Suhan Data 035 jan 83159448 040 qa DLC te DLC fd DLO 100 1 0 fa Shakespeare Wiliam td 1564 1616 Coriolanus 400 0 Ja Shakyspyaiy Wilian JU 156416 16 LI Works ul Willian Shakwspuaie 1665 670 a His Works of Wiliam Shakespeare 1865 b contains Coriolanus and ono othor work System Control Number MESJAM 4 Figure 2 20 Authority record MARC tab Authority Leader The Authority Leader Information allows you to select the Record Status and the Encoding Level The Authority Type has only one type so it always displays a z The Authority Leader field displays as a grid which is completely configurable using Voyager s MARC tag tables See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for details on the MARC tag tables The procedure for configuring the Authority leader is shown in Procedure 2 8 Configuring the Authority Leader on page 2 29 Procedure 2 8 Configuring the Authority Leader Use the following to configure the Authority leader 1 Click the Leader button see Figure 2 21 from an open Authority record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 29 Figure 2 21 Leader Button Result The Leader dialog box see Figure 2 22 opens
206. he batch job and identifies those check boxes to initiate the change h Running the third batch job batch job 13 completes the changes that have been checked and saves them to the database An alternative method of making these changes without the Global Headings Change Queue is to change the records directly You can bring up the bibliographic records that have the old authority heading and update all of the references manually This removes the heading from the queue Global Change Process For more information on batch jobs 11 13 see the Voyager Technical User s Guide a When a change is made to an authority record and saved to the database the record with the change displays in the Global Headings Change Queue as it used to be before the changes were made See Figure 9 4 This is the first level of heading changes in the tree structure Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 9 9 61532 Theater demo 11 11 98 09 26 PM Subject Process He Bibs amp O Theaters Arena theater Children s plays Community theater Experimental theater Field old Figure 9 4 Global Heading Preview Intial State You can view the full Authority record in MARC format by highlighting the record and clicking the Auth button See Figure 9 5 Voyager Cataloging Bae Biot Fic Edit Record Display Options Window Help Ne i D a EAR Alg 2 zam eH New Open Save
207. he call number into the MFHD 852 h and 852 i fields Rather than having to type in the call number or copy and paste the call number from the MFHD s associated bibliographic record the call number could be automatically inserted into the MFHD via the appropriate menu option This minimizes keystrokes and associated errors It also eliminates the overall awkwardness of copying the call number from an open bib record and pasting it into the appropriate MFHD field NOTE If a bibliographic record contains multiple instances of call number information as specified in the call number hierarchy such as more than one 090 fa the system adds the last instance of the call number information 090 fa to subfield h and subfield i of the MFHD Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 45 Setting Up to Use Get Call Number from Bib Record You must select a call number hierarchy in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences in order to use get call number from bib record The call number hierarchy indicates the type of call number such as LC or Dewey placed in the MFHD For instance if you want an LC call number to be placed in the MFHD you would select the LC call number hierarchy If you do not select a call number hierarchy in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences you are not able to use the get call number from bib record function A IMPORTANT The fields of the b
208. he interface which when used with ImageServer uses a browser instead of Scandoc to view the images The default value for this field is blank Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 7 a Yoyager Cataloging aad i i lol xi File Edt Record Display Options Window Help 7 0 a a c 222 S35 age DB New Hidgs Get Hidgs New Items Get Items New Open Save Search Headings Hierarchy Bib 66904 B ai sakabiManas apun thi N an ar ag ar agi MARC System Hitow Leader 01369cam a22002651 45x0 og i Invalid Character os poen o _008 es1028 s 1962 i M 12 Subfield Data ta sa 65004209 ta OCoLC ocm23577356 ta EYM tc EYM td CGU ta PKI718 41 tb B3 Orien Ben PCr a eee a A kabi biracita c Candrakanta Cakrabarti i kartrka samortita 6 245 02 ta ar afa ort Ry th at at a rate ae fo DSSS a Pa TTS 6 880 02 ta 1 samskarana 6 250 02 ta 1 TORR 6 880 3 ta Kalikata th Shtandarda Pa 8 ta FeR th rere TMS ROT AAA RRR tc xl MARC Character Set Validation on process Please Wait 359PM_ 4 Figure 10 3 Invalid MARC21 Characters message when storing record Work Flow Tab Figure 10 4 Customize the options on the Work Flow tab see Figure 10 4 to match your preferences using Table 10 3 for a description of each option Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 10 8 Febr
209. hich may be pasted into the variable fields portion of a MARC record It is also used when vali dating a heading See the Voyager Cataloging User s Guide Navagation Buttons After a browse search use these buttons to navigate through the results Iq 4 gt bl Reference Information Dialog Box Additional reference information can be displayed for titles that display the following in the Headings List e Authorized e Reference e Note e Ref Note By clicking the Authority button or right clicking the row the Reference Information dialog box opens see Figure 3 38 Reference Information Narrower Term Arms control Narrower Term Battles Narrower Term Biological warfare Narrower Term Chemical warfare Narrower Term Civil war Narrower Term Disarmament Narrower Term Escalation Military science xl Figure 3 38 Reference Information dialog box Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 43 This dialog lists whether authority record information is available as well as Scope Notes Narrower terms See and or See Also reference s for the selected heading See Table 3 7 for a description of each type of associated information Table 3 7 Authorized Reference Auth Ref and Note Descriptions Label Description Authorized This term displays if the heading is in the 1XX field of the authority record Refere
210. holdings is shown in Procedure 3 15 Retrieve Holdings on page 3 75 Procedure 3 15 Retrieve Holdings Use the following to retrieve holdings 1 Select Record gt Retrieve Holdings or click the Retrieve Holdings button Figure 3 70 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 75 Figure 3 70 Retrieve Holdings Button Result If there is only one holdings record associated with the active bibliographic record the holdings record opens If the bibliographic record has more than one holdings record associated with it the Retrieve Holdings dialog box opens Figure 3 71 Select or add holdings records Main Reference Department G116 Figure 3 71 Retrieve Holdings dialog box This dialog box lists the ID Location and Call Number for all the holdings records attached to the active bibliographic record Click New Retrieve after selecting record to retrieve or Cancel Result You can enter a new record view retrieve a selected record or exit from this dialog box 3 76 The procedure for retrieving authority records is shown in Procedure 3 16 Retrieve Authority on page 3 77 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Procedure 3 16 Retrieve Authority Use the following to retrieve authority rec
211. humbnail displays in the Titles Index in WebVoyage Image Server Links If your library uses Image Server and you want to specify a link to images stored in the Image Server database 7 is the first indicator in the 856 field as in the following example 856 7 2 sdc 10 10 4 z public note NOTE When a record with an Image Server link displays in the Title Index in WebVoyage a thumbnail displays Image Server adds a link to both existing bibliographic records and existing holdings records The 856 is created automatically with a value of 7 in the first indicator 2 tf and z are also filled in during the creation tg DOI and URN Links If you want to link to a DOI or URN you can use fg as in the following example 856 g DOT 87955754 z DOI link to somewhere For information about what needs to be set up in order for DOI or URN links to be successful in OPAC see the Voyager WebVoyage User s Guide Verifying 856 Links You can verify the integrity of 856 links in the current bibliographic or holdings record by selecting Record gt Verify 856 links from the Cataloging main menu or by using the Ctrl K keystroke This opens the 856 Links dialog box See Figure 2 17 NOTE If the record does not have any 856 links an error message displays to that effect See Table 2 2 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating
212. i U F510 u Bib Id F200 Author F203 Imprint Title F202 Title Brief F201 Figure 4 9 Sample label print template file Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 4 26 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information Line 66 67 Print Template Piece Bibliographic 68 Name B F102 b 69 Addr1 U F510 u 70 Bib Id F200 71 Author F203 72 Imprint 73 Title F202 74 Title Brief F201 Wis 76 Print Options Holdings 77 StandardFont Times New Roman 78 StandardFontSize 12 79 AlternateFont Arial 80 AlternateFontSize 12 81 Copies 1 82 TabWidth 1 83 Margin 0 05 84 SpineLabelHeight 1 625 85 SpineLabelWidth 9 86 PieceLabelHeight 1 625 87 PieceLabelWidth 2 9 88 89 Print Template Spine Holdings 90 Mfhd Id F300 91 Call Number F301 92 93 Print Template Piece Holdings 94 Mfhd Id F300 95 Call Number F301 96 97 Print Options Item 98 StandardFont Times New Roman Figure 4 9 Sample label print template file Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 27 Line 99 StandardFontSize 12 100 AlternateFont Arial 101 AlternateFontSize 12 102 Copies 1 103 TabWidth 1 104 Margin 0 05 105 SpineLabelHeight 1 625 106 SpineLabelWidth 9 107 PieceLabelHeight 1 625 108 PieceLabelWidth 2 9 109 110 P
213. iacritic and non Roman characters in Voyager MARC records such as the following e Special Character Entry e Special Character Mode e Cut amp Paste from another program such as the Microsoft Character Map e Customize Regional Options to input non Roman characters from a different language e Import MARC records with diacritic and non Roman characters Special Character Entry The procedure for entering diacritic or non Roman characters using Special Character Entry is shown in Procedure 6 1 Special Character Entry on page 6 2 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 6 1 Procedure 6 1 Special Character Entry Use the following to enter a diacritic or non Roman character with Special Character Entry 1 Select Special Character Entry Ctri E from the Edit menu Result The Special Character Entry dialog box opens See Figure 6 1 Special Character Entry E Text insert es Acute Combining Acute Accent Oxia Alif Modifier Letter Right Half Ring Alpha Or 0251 Ayn Modifier Letter Turned Comma Beta Breve Combining Breve Vrachy British Pound Pound Sign is e a Insert Close Close Figure 6 1 Special Character Entry 2 Select the diacritic character and click Insert or Insert Close Result This inserts the character in the MARC record and leaves the Special Character Entry dialog box open or closed respectively
214. ibliographic record in which the system checks for call numbers such as 050 082 090 and so on differ for each call number type You must define these fields for each call number type in the System Administration module and then select the call number type as part of the appropriate Cataloging Policy Group See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details The procedure for setting the call number hierarchy is shown in Procedure 2 16 Setting the Call Number Hierarchy on page 2 46 Procedure 2 16 Setting the Call Number Hierarchy 3 2 46 Use the following to set the call number hierarchy Select Options gt Preferences from the Cataloging toolbar Result The Session Defaults and Preferences dialog box opens From the General tab click the arrow at the far right of the Call Number Hierarchies drop down menu Result A list with hierarchy names codes and call number classes displays see Figure 2 34 Select from the list the call number hierarchy you want to input in the MFHD and click the OK button Example If you want to have an LC call number placed in the MFHD select the LC call number hierarchy Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating m Session Defaults and Preferences John Hopkin s Acquisition jez None None None E DD OCLC Dewey Decimal LC OCLCAD 0 Library of Congress w SUDOCS
215. icode Record Types and Creating the OK to export check box and the two radio buttons indicating export dates in the Last set for By and At textboxes Suppress from OPAC Option To prevent a holdings record from displaying in the OPAC module mark the Suppress from OPAC check box This does not prevent the display in OPAC of information from the bibliographic record However this prevents information from attached item records from displaying in the OPAC However if the Suppress from OPAC check box for a location is checked in the System Administration module you cannot uncheck the Suppress from OPAC check box in Cataloging See the Locations section of the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details ie TIP When the Suppress from OPAC box is checked the small book icon in the top left corner of the record is greyed When the check box is unchecked the icon displays in a reddish burgundy shade This gives you a visual indication of the status of the record Bib Title s Tab The Bib Title s tab see Figure 2 27 shows the associated bibliographic ID and title for the holding Double click the title to display the bibliographic record Hidg 39913 When cats dream story and paintings by Day Pilkey OF x MARC System History Title When cats dream story and paintings by Day Pilkey Tag 11 12 Subfield Data 014 1 fa com24320332 852 0 tb edu juy
216. igit or space any digit or sign any letter any letter or space gt solri olo any letter or digit o any letter digit or space amp any character Thus in Figure A 16 you can enter any combination of 4 digits or spaces for the Date 1 field The number of characters in the mask must equal the fourth column entry 008 Books Publication Status O08PublicationStatus Ty Mp Date 1 yyyy lt lt lt TEXT gt gt gt 8 4 9999 Figure A 16 Using Text Mask Characters in 008 Books Stanza The sample template configuration stanza in Figure A 16 results in the template in the Cataloging module as seen in Figure A 17 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 21 008 General Description Book s Single known date probable date xi 1949 nyu New York State Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set f ibl Obsolete Code or Value Not Set 0 Not a conference publication 0 Not a festschrift
217. in bibliographic records and the bib record affected by the change Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 9 5 9 6 Table 9 3 Tree Descriptions Tree Level Description Third level Displays all authority headings affected by the changed 1xx or 18x heading in level one Those headings affected include the 1xx 4xx or 5xx fields NOTE If a 4xx displays in the third level and its level one heading is not a subdivision for example you have a 4xx pointing to a 1xx that is the same as the 4xx it is a sign of a conflicting authority record The levels of the tree are shown in Figure 9 2 Voyager Cataloging of x File Process Record Display Options Help 0 S 6 aa 4 e 33 2 Global Headings Change amp Preview Queues History W 27 PM General Subdivision e ac T No 48051 Afghanistan History Africa Central history today Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Africa Eastern history today 2 No Africa history today 7 No Africa history today 1960 5 No Auth ID 1XX Headi 48065 Africa History 1960 Africa history today 20th century Africa history today To 1884 Africa North history today Africa North history today 1882 Africa Sub Saharan history today Africa West history today Africa West history today To 1884 0 2 8 A A E oo00008 jg E Position the mouse over a button for he
218. ing entered in the Search for field and pass it to the alternate search facility to execute when you click this uniquely defined alternate search button e Access the search facility without including the text string The URI search option is defined in the voyager ini file For more information about setup for this feature see the description of the SearchURI stanza in the voyager ini file located in the Voyager Technical User s Guide Setting Search Preferences Users can create session level searching defaults to make it more efficient Retain Last Search Checking the Retain Last Search check box causes the search information from your last search to be saved until the current Voyager session is exited That way if you want to perform the same search again you do not have to redefine your search type and text This check box is found in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences work space on the Work Flow tab Automatic Truncation for Non Keyword Searches Checking the Automatic Truncation for Non Keyword Searches check box causes a non keyword search to be automatically truncated without requiring the question mark for a truncation character This check box is found in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences work space on the Work Flow tab Display Bibliographic Record Directly If Search Results In Only One Title Checking the Display Bibliographic Record Directly If Search Results in Only One Title check box ca
219. ing library material Record Relationships Holdings records are linked to bibliographic records to represent each copy that your library has Item records are linked to holdings records for each volume and or circulating piece of a copy Figure 2 1 Z E o Authority Authority Record Record Bibliographic Record LOOO P Holdings Record Holdings Record copy1 copy 2 Item Record volume 1 Item Record Lo Loo volume 1 foo foo Item Record Item Record volume 2 volume 2 Figure 2 1 Voyager record relationships Fields Voyager uses the 852 field for the location and call number e Subfield b records the item s location using location codes defined in System Administration e Subfields h and i have the call number Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 2 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating A IMPORTANT These are the only indexed fields in the holdings record The 866 field is often used to display a library s summary holding information for serials and multi volume sets This displays in the OPAC to inform library patrons of what you own Voyager item records include information about an item s permanent and temporary location and an item s type and temporary type This information along with the barcode stored in the item record is used by the Circulation module for circulation transactions The
220. ings List 3 41 3 36 Headings List Button 3 41 3 37 Stop button seen with more than 100 search results 3 42 3 38 Reference Information dialog box 3 43 3 39 Scope Notes for a heading 3 45 3 40 Narrower term 3 45 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xiii Figures 3 41 3 42 3 43 3 44 3 45 3 46 3 47 3 48 3 49 3 50 3 51 3 52 3 53 3 54 3 55 3 56 3 57 3 58 3 59 3 60 3 61 3 62 3 63 3 64 3 65 3 66 3 67 3 68 3 69 3 70 3 71 3 72 3 73 Search results from the narrower term See Also See Also search results Type of search Completed Non keyword tab Builder tab Builder search tab Builder tab with multiple search terms and relationships Search dialog box History tab Search Limits dialog box Search Limits dialog box Expanded list of limits Computer file selected as search limit Selected search limits listed in the bottom portion of the dialog box Remote button on Search dialog box Voyager Connection Options dialog box Selected locations in the Voyager Connection Options dialog box Remote Search dialog box Search by options Simultaneous Search dialog box Search Status dialog box Titles Index following a simultaneous search Send Record To WebVoyage Establishing at least view only access to line items in Acquisitions Error message if not logged into both modules Error message if lo
221. into the last column of the stanza See Column 5 on page A 20 for a description of mask values Any attempt to use this value for a drop down menu stanza name will be ignored by the system and it will automatically be made into a text box Column 3 This column defines the character position of this value in the record integer value as defined in the MARC standard Column 4 This column defines the length of the selection This should match the length of the key of the drop down menu selection integer value Column 5 This column serves two purposes e Default value for the drop down menu e Mask for the text box Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page A 20 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode MARC Tag Tables Although the default for this column is a value set by Endeavor to be appropriate for all users _ for Unknown or not specified you can change it if you wish If you do change it make sure the value is valid or an unpredictable error may occur Si TIP Make a backup copy of every locally edited configuration file in a separate file location If the default for the drop down menu does not exist in the possible list of selections nothing will be displayed as a default and you can still make other selections as normal The text mask is defined to use the following characters See Table A 1 Table A 1 Text Masking Options Text Mask Description any digit any d
222. ion was last set display below the OK to export check box and the two radio buttons indicating export dates in the Last set for By and At textboxes History Tab Press Alt Y from an open authority record to switch to the History tab The History tab includes a list of every change ever made to an authority record see Figure 2 26 These changes are described in Table 2 5 Table 2 5 History Tab Field Descriptions Field Name Description Date Time The date and the time the change was made Operator The operator who made the change actually the operator name as assigned in System Administra tion Cataloging Location The happening location as defined in System Administration at which the change was made Action The action performed on the record UPDATE CRE ATE MERGE REPLACE or RELINK Encoding Level The encoding level as set in the Leader field of the record Suppress Action Whether or not the Suppress from OPAC check box was checked on the System tab Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 35 Yoyager Cataloging aip File Edit Record Display Options Window Help 4 48 a5 A O exa Saveto DB New Hidas GetHidgs New ltems Get tems Hierarchy Help New Open Save Search Headings Titles CREATE n Complete authority record _ Tag he Suei Da 3 035 fan 831
223. ions 10 1 holdings record 2 37 Options menu 10 24 MARC tag tables A 1 A 23 owning library 4 4 MARCTemplate folder 5 21 5 24 mass changes Pick and Scan 7 1 Menus a description of 10 19 P Display 10 24 Edit 10 20 File 10 19 Passwords 1 4 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode IN 5 photocopying documentation xxxi Pick and Scan 7 1 Piece labels 4 14 Preferences cataloging options 10 1 Print Template stanza action codes 4 19 changing font size 4 21 initiating and ending action codes 4 20 inserting a blank line 4 21 inserting atab 4 22 printing field information 4 20 printing in the alternate font 4 20 Printing action codes 4 19 alternate font 4 20 field codes 4 22 labels 4 14 records 4 13 spinelabel cfg 4 17 templates 4 17 4 24 Q Quitting 1 5 R radio button Boolean 3 31 Browse 3 37 Free Text 3 31 Record authority 2 28 2 34 bibliographic 2 3 2 24 4 2 closing 4 30 colors of 10 16 copying 4 13 creating 3 1 3 5 3 8 deleting 4 2 4 3 description of 2 1 editing 4 1 4 2 holdings 2 36 importing 3 11 3 14 invalid 3 24 item 2 56 linking 3 80 opening 3 8 3 10 printing 4 13 retrieving authority 3 77 holdings 3 75 3 76 item 3 77 saving 4 5 templates 8 1 8 3 10 13 types 2 2 unlinking 3 80 validate heading 4 11 validation 9 1 9 2 record creating
224. irst page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 15 Table 10 6 Mapping tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description MARC Mapping for This feature is used specifically in conjunction with Image OCR Data Server This feature applies to the sending of Full Text OCR Tag data text read from a non searchable image stored in Image Indicator 1 Server from the Image Server program to an active biblio graphic record in Cataloging Once the OCR data is inserted Indicator 2 into an active bibliographic record the data is then searchable Subfield through Voyager Specify the Tag Indicator 1 Indicator 2 and Subfield where OCR data should be inserted into an active bibliographic record If you do not specify this information the following defaults will be used Tag 500 Indicator 1 none Indicator 2 none Subfield a NOTE A maximum of 1600 characters will fit into a single field of a MARC record Each time a field reaches this limit another identical field will be created into which the rest of the data will be inserted In addition it should be noted that the maximum record size for a MARC record in Voyager is 64K Colors Fonts Tab Figure 10 8 You can change the background color and the text color for your records You can define the colors displayed for the following records e MARC Views variable fields e Record Hierarchy e Global Headings Change Hierarchy End
225. isitions FP View Only Serials Check4n IV Process Claims from Serials Control M Profi F View Gnly Problems and Claims Lists aster Profiles IV Add Update Serial Patt F View Gnly Serial Patterns JA J Delete Serial Patterns IV Attach Holding to any Biblographic Record Operator Profiles cen Security Acquisition Serials Profiles 12 28PM Figure 3 63 Establishing at least view only access to line items in Acquisitions The procedure for using the Acq in the Cat function is shown in Procedure 3 14 Using the Acq in the Cat Function on page 3 70 Procedure 3 14 Using the Acq in the Cat Function Use the following steps to work with the Acq in the Cat function 1 Log into both the Cataloging and the Acquisitions modules using the same User ID and Password If you are not logged into both modules an error message displays See Figure 3 64 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 70 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Voyager Cataloging Figure 3 64 Error message if not logged into both modules If you are logged into Cataloging and Acquisitions with different User IDs and Passwords an error message opens See Figure 3 65 Voyager Cataloging Figure 3 65 Error message if logged into modules with different User IDs and Passwords 2 Open a bibliographic or holdings record In the Cataloging module See Opening a Reco
226. iting Variable Fields Deleting Variable Fields Displaying Attachments 856 Links and Tables of Contents in WebVoyage Attachments 856 Field Links Table of Contents System Tab OK to Export Option Suppress from OPAC Option History Tab Sorting the columns Lag Time Viewing and Editing Line Items from Bibliographic Records Authority Records Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 4 2 6 2 6 2 9 2 12 2 14 2 15 2 18 2 20 2 20 2 20 2 24 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 26 2 27 2 27 2 28 2 28 TM 2 i Contents e MARC Tab e Authority Leader e Authority 008 Fixed Field e Variable Fields e System Tab OK to Export Option e History Tab Sorting the columns Lag Time Holdings Records e MARC Tab e Holdings Leader e Holdings 007 Fixed Field e Holdings 008 Fixed Field e Variable Fields Get Call Number from Bib Record e System Tab OK to Export Option Suppress from OPAC Option e Bib Title s Tab e History Tab Sorting the columns Lag Time e Viewing and Editing Line Items from Holdings Records Item Records e Checking for Duplicate Barcodes e Header Information e Location and Type e Item Holdings e Item Details e Statuses e Statistical Categories Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 ii February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 28 2 29 2 31 2 33 2 34 2 34 2 35 2 36 2 36 2 36 2 37 2
227. iting a Template 8 2 8 3 Deleting a Template 8 3 a 10 Session Defaults and Menu Options 10 1 Changing Colors and Fonts 10 17 D A MARC Tag Tables A 1 Accessing the 006 Field Grid A 11 i Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xxv Procedures Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page xxvi February 2004 Voyager with Unicode About This Document Purpose This document provides instructions for working with the Cataloging module Intended Audience This document is intended for Voyager customers who are responsible for customizing and implementing Voyager Cataloging Reason for Reissue This manual incorporates and is being reissued for the following reasons e Unicode implementation e Merger of the Voyager Bibliographic Record Linking amp MARC Derivation of Records User s Guide information specific to the Cataloging module into the Voyager Cataloging User s Guide e New section in the About chapter regarding permission to reproduce documentation e Changes requested through Customer First feedback Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xxvii How to Use This Document xxviii This document consists of the following Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Ch
228. ition 9 abt Processing Result Imported Records Contents MARC21 UTF 8 a No Conversion Load into Database MARC21 UTF 8 Space Error Out amp Log OCLC non Unicode a Error Out amp Log OCLC non Unicode Space Successful Load into Database OCLC non Unicode Space Failure Error Out amp Log RLIN legacy non Unicode a Error Out amp Log RLIN legacy non Unicode Space Successful Load RLIN legacy non Unicode Space Failure Error Out amp Log Latin 1 non Unicode a Error Out amp Log C 8 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Voyager with Unicode Considerations Table C 5 BulkImport Rules Results Mapping Leader Expected Character Set of Position 9 hr Processing Result Imported Records Contents Latin 1 non Unicode Space Successful Load Latin 1 non Unicode Space Failure Error Out amp Log MARC21 MARC 8 non Unicode a Error Out amp Log MARC21 MARC 8 non Unicode Space Successful Load MARC21 MARC 8 non Unicode Space Failure Error Out amp Log Voyager legacy non Unicode a Error Out amp Log Voyager legacy non Unicode Space Successful Load Voyager legacy non Unicode Space Failure Error Out amp Log Subfield Character The subfield character continues to be recognized as a subfield delimiter character and cannot be used as content in a record It is reserved for this purpose The s
229. l IMPORTANT These values are used during MARC validation in the Cataloging module The system gives particular attention to mandatory subfields those with a value of M If it is a mandatory subfield and no value is set for it in the Cataloging module you get a warning message when you try to save the record indicating that you have left out a mandatory field Subfield and subfield definition The subfield subfield definition stanza component describes the values that you input to the subfield in the Cataloging module In the Cataloging module when you press F2 with your cursor in the appropriate subfield the values entered in this component display In Figure A 6 subfield a is the linkage number subfield b is the source of number subfield z is the cancelled invalid linkage number and subfield 9 is the old holdings linkage number Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page A 8 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode MARC Tag Tables Indicator value Valid indicator values are specified in this component of the stanza In Figure A 6 the valid values for indicator 1 of the 014 field are 0 and 1 as defined in the second last stanza and the valid value for indicator 2 of the 014 is 0 as defined in the last stanza Indicator and indicator definition The indicator indicator definition component specifies the indicator values for the indicators of MARC fields In Figure A 6 the definition for valid value 0 i
230. l User s Guide Importing Records From a File The procedure for importing records from a file is shown in Procedure 3 1 Creating a New Record on page 3 2 Procedure 3 5 Importing Records From a File Use the following to import records from a file 1 Select Record gt Import gt From new file or Record gt Import gt From previous file You can specify a default folder from which you want to import records in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences see 10 12 Result The Select Import File dialog box opens see Figure 3 12 NOTE For the Record gt Import gt From previous file command to be enabled you must first select a new file via the Record gt Import gt From new file command If you have not selected a new file or if you exit Cataloging and log back in the Record gt Import gt From previous file command will be grayed out Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 12 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Select Import File 3 Bib Records to Import Figure 3 12 Select Import File dialog box 2 Select the file you want to import and click Open Result A dialog box opens allowing you to select the specific record you want to import Figure 3 13 H Training Records for Import sei05 dat A The pursuit of loneliness Chinese and Japanese nature poetry in medie Principles of biomedical ethics Z Tom L Beauchamp Ja
231. lay drop down menu selections Result Leader options display for you to select NOTE Use either the mouse or the up down arrow keys on your keyboard to move from cell to cell within the grid or from option to option in the drop down lists The Tab Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 5 key is not available for use within the grid Using the Tab key takes you outside the grid altogether a TIP You can also enter the letter or number that precedes an option in a drop down list to make a selection For instance if you want to jump from subfield z within the drop down list to subfield a simply press the letter a Click OK or Cancel Result This saves your work and exits the Leader dialog box or exits the dialog box without saving Bibliographic 005 Fixed Field The 005 field is a system applied field containing 16 characters that specify the date and time of the latest record transaction These characters are recorded in the pattern YYYYMMDDHHMMSS that represents year month day hour minute second and decimal fraction of a second Bibliographic 006 Fixed Field The 006 field is a repeatable field that allows you to add other bibliographic formats The 006 field displays as a tabbed dialog box which is completely configurable using Voyager s MARC tag tables See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for details on the MARC tag tables The proce
232. lay in the record e Records with the term are to be excluded e The term is important Do Search Button Executes the search Cancel Button Cancels the search and closes the Search dialog box Clear Button Deletes the search term s in the Search for text box Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 31 Table 3 3 Keyword tab selections Name Type Description Limit Button Opens the Search Limits dialog box where you can limit your search by language location date or other variables as they relate to your search See page Search Limits on page 3 54 Remote Button The Remote button if configured allows users to search remote databases See Remote Databases on page 3 58 URI Button If configured this button invokes a user defined URI Uniform Search Resource Identifier to search outside the Voyager database Keyword Search Results The Titles Index A Keyword search returns results in a Titles Index dialog box see Figure 3 26 Titles Index J i Font Arial x Relevance Full Title Author Format Understanding TOEFL sound recording Sound Recording Listening to TOEFL sound recording Development of intelligence in children by Alfred Binet and Theodore Simon with marginal notes by Lewis M Terman new preface by Lloyd M Dunn How to prepare for the graduate management admission test GMAT by E
233. lding down the Ctrl key and clicking the rows NOTE If you cut and paste information from a different application such as Microsoft Word some characters are stripped out Insert Field Before F3 Adds a blank MARC field before the active field Insert Field After F4 Adds a blank MARC field after the active field Delete Field Del Deletes the active MARC field This field or sub field cannot then be pasted elsewhere Unselect Text F11 Unselects the currently selected text Insert Subfield F9 Adds a blank MARC subfield with delimiter Diacritic Entry Ctrl e Displays the Diacritic Entry dialog box and allows you to choose a diacritic character for entering in your record Diacritic Mode Ctrl d Allows you to change your keyboard to diacritic mode Show Marc Values F2 Displays a selection table with all valid MARC values for the active field or subfield Show Holdings Locations Ctrl L Displays all available holdings locations and abbreviations for your security access level Insert URL from Browser Ctrl U Creates a new 856 field containing the URL of the page currently displayed in your Web browser Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 21 Record Menu The contents of the Record menu is shown in Table 10 10 Table 10 10 Record Menu Option Description
234. lding Location Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 7 3 Pick And Scan Poems i E raa peme l eee r m Figure 7 3 Temporary Type options IMPORTANT When the Delete option is selected a pop up warning message displays This is the only notification received for the deletion request See Figure 7 4 Figure 7 4 Delete warning message The drop down lists display the locations stored in the operator s security profile The default option in all cases is No Change and Clear is provided as an option for non required fields in the item record Required fields include the following fields e Holding Location e Permanent Location Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 7 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Pick and Scan e Permanent Type NOTE Pick and Scan modifications to the Holding Location option change the MFHD 852 tb The Permanent Type and Temporary Type drop down lists display the type values stored in Voyager System Administration for Item Types The Media Type drop down list displays the type values stored in Voyager Media System Administration within Media Types Pick And Scan Item Options Items f tem Status Holding Location Mo Chance x At Bindery i Clear All Permanent Location No Chance EEEE Cataloging Review eee 3 Circulation Review T
235. le BEI Look in Template Al c l ia Auth tem a component772 tem a Auth 100 tem ja Hold tem a Auth 110 tem a HoldM tem a AuthM tem ia prectem ia Bib tem a BibM tern Files of type Template tem x Cancel T Open as read only Zn Figure 5 5 Open Template File dialog box 2 Select the template file you want to edit and click Open or double click the file Result The selected template opens 3 Edit the template by changing the leader fixed fields and variable fields You can use the same commands as you use for editing a record For more information about editing and the leader fixed and variable fields see the Voyager Cataloging User s Guide 4 Select File gt Save from the menu to save the template with the same name Select File gt Save As to save the template with a different name If you use Save As the extension for the file must be tem NOTE When a template is saved it is not validated against authority records or the MARC tag table The procedure for deleting a new template is shown in Procedure 5 3 Deleting a Template on page 5 8 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 7 Procedure 5 3 Deleting a Template Use the following to delete a template 1 Select File gt Template gt Edit from the menu 2 Select the template you want to delete and click Open or double click the templ
236. list is displayed click the Save button then click the Cancel button to close the Retrieve Items dialog box Click the Cancel button before clicking the save button to close the dialog box without saving the new sequencing order of the items Viewing Holdings Locations To list all locations for which you are authorized select Edit gt Show Holdings Locations or press Ctrl L The Holdings Locations dialog box opens Figure 3 75 alid alues q Other Branch Acq Desk Other Branch Cat Desk Other Branch Circ Desk Branch General Biology Branch Periodicals x Figure 3 75 Show holdings Valid MARC Values dialog box You must be in the subfield data field of a Holdings record to access this dialog box This command displays all holdings locations and their abbreviations for your security access level You can use this dialog box to change or add a location to a holdings record Place your cursor after the subfield b marker display the valid values Ctrl L highlight a location and click OK or double click a location Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 79 Linking and Unlinking Records With the Cataloging module you can link an item to multiple bibliographic records in order to accommodate a bound with situation The ability to link bibliographic records and item records depends upon which type of record the active record
237. long with the validated headings Only the headings in error display when this option is not selected Heading Type Name Select this option to have Name heading types validated Heading TypesTitle Select this option to have Title heading types validated Heading Types Name Title Select this option to have Name Title heading types validated Heading Types Subject Select this option to have Subject heading types validated 10 6 February 2004 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Table 10 2 Validation tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Heading Types Subdivision Select this option to have Subdivision heading types validated Subdivision can only be selected if Subject is selected 856 link servers URN You can specify the locations of the various servers that are activated by an 856 link in the 856 link servers dialog box You can specify the location of the URN the DOI and Image Server URN Uniform Resource Name and DOI Digital Object Identifier work different than URL addresses Uniform Resource Locator in that the URN or DOI identification in the 856 field of the MARC record does not point directly to the digital item Rather the URN or DOI identification is first routed through a handler server which then maps the URN or DOI to the phy
238. lows you to make up to three unsuccessful attempts to log in before terminating the program Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Getting Started 3 Optional For systems with more than one happening location defined in Voyager System Administration a Select a cataloging location dialog box displays from which you need to select an appropriate Cataloging location see Figure 1 3 and click OK Result The main Cataloging window displays Select a cataloging location Cataloging Desk Training Master DB Media Department Training Master DB Rare Book Collection Training Master DB Figure 1 3 Select a cataloging location dialog box Exiting Cataloging You can exit Cataloging by selecting File gt Exit If you have open records that have been edited but not saved you are asked to save the records or ignore the changes Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 1 5 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 1 6 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Contents Introduction Types of Records Record Relationships Fields Bibliographic Records MARC Tab Bibliographic Leader Bibliographic 005 Fixed Field Bibliographic 006 Fixed Field Bibliographic 007 Fixed Field Bibliographic 008 Fixed Field Variable Fields Adding and Ed
239. lp Figure 9 2 Global Headings Change Queue Tree Levels In order for Global Headings Changes to be completed three batch processing jobs must be run They must be run in the following order 1 Job 11 2 Job 12 3 Job 13 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Authority Control For more information see the Voyager Technical User s Guide Each job only processes records that have had the previous job run on them If you run the same job consecutively it is ignored the second time The Bibs column bibliographic count that displays in level two of the Global Headings Change Queue tree indicates the number of times the authority heading occurs in a bibliographic record The bibliographic count that displays in the preview queue displays the number of bibliographic records to be processed with the new heading See Figure 9 3 Ay IMPORTANT Any records to be processed through the Global Headings Change Queue must not be manually changed between each step of the batch job If changes are made manually the records in which changes were made are removed from the queue Voyager Cataloging File Process Record Display Options Help Theater demo 11 11 98 09 26 PM Subject Process Heading New Bibs Authorized 8 O Theaters 0 Yes da Typel Auth mi Beach Amateur theater Arena theater Children s plays Community theater Experimental theater
240. m inal Figure 3 31 MARC tab of the selected title Non Keyword Tab and Heading and Non Keyword Left Anchored Searching Heading Non Keyword searching allows users to perform left anchored bibliographic searches holdings searches authorities searches and heading searches Your institution defines what searches are available Search types are created in System Administration See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details Figure 3 32 displays the Non Keyword tab of the Search dialog box Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 36 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records o Se Keyword Non Keyword Builder History Search by Find Pa Title x rowse Heading Types Filter Search for Cancel Clea Limit Remote Go to Googe Locations Filter Figure 3 32 Non Keyword tab Table 3 5 describes the Non Keyword tab Table 3 5 Non Keyword tab Name Type Description Search By section Find Browse Search type Heading Types Filter Radio button Radio button Drop down List Find searches match specific records of the Search by type to the terms entered in the Search for field The result is a finite number s of records See Find and Browse Searches on page 3 38 Displays an index of headings that can be browsed based on the
241. mes F Childres The unforgettable Winston Churchill giant of the century by the editor Selected plays of Eugene O Neill introd by Jose Quintero The gender politics of HIV AIDS in women perspectives on the panden Genetics of criminal and antisocial behaviour The visionary cosmos Peter Russell s and Edith Sitwell s poetry and pc Inventing Mark Twain the lives of Samuel Langhorne Clemens Andrey Romantic theatricality gender poetry and spectatorship Judith Pasce El io 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 3 13 Selecting a record to import Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 13 The dialog box that opens when you select a file from which you want to import records includes the four columns described in Table 3 1 See Figure 3 13 Table 3 1 Description of Column Headings for Import Record List Column Name Description Seq Sequential count of the order in which the record was added to the import file For example if the record was added to the import file fourth the Seq would be 4 ID Record ID assigned by the database or utility of origin Type Record type and bibliographic level from bytes 6 and 7 of the Leader field Title Heading The 245 field if a bibliographic record or the 1XX field if an authority record NOTE The number of valid records and the number of
242. mits on page 3 54 for more informa tion Remote Button The Remote button if configured allows users to search remote databases See Remote Databases on page 3 58 URI Search Button If configured this button invokes a user defined URI Uniform Resource Identifier to search outside the Voyager database Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 50 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records The procedure for Performing a Builder search is shown in Procedure 3 9 Performing a Builder search on page 3 51 Procedure 3 9 Performing a Builder search Use the following to perform a Builder search 1 From the Search dialog box click the Builder tab Result The Builder tab opens see Figure 3 47 searen Keyword Non Kepword Builder History Search for fany of these Search in keyword Anywhere And Or Not Edit Delete Cancel Gest Limit Bemote Go to Google Figure 3 47 Builder search tab 2 Enter a search term s or phrase in the Search for field 6 3 Select the any all or phrase option from the drop down list to the right of the Search for field See Builder tab on page 3 50 for a description of the options 4 Select a Search In field for matching the search terms OPTIONAL 5 To use multiple search rows click any of the Boolean operato
243. n gt right closing angle bracket Table 5 3 Description of the first example in line 2 of Figure 5 7 Component Description t delimiter symbol hex 1f lt left opening angle bracket t delimiter symbol hex 1f x subfield in target record 022 tag in source record a subfield in source record gt right closing angle bracket IMPORTANT The delimiter symbol must always be immediately followed by the left opening angle bracket at the beginning of a derivation field Other than that one exception spacing for derivation fields is irrelevant Table 5 4 Examples of spacing in derivation fields Correct Format Incorrect Format t lt 022a gt lt 022a gt lt _ x_022a gt lt _ x_022a gt NOTE In Table 5 4 the underscore _ character in the incorrect formats indicates a space The system automatically adds spacing in the Voyager Cataloging module However this spacing applies only to the display in the module It does not translate into spacing for the WebVoyage display of records So how does the system decipher this derivation field It depends on which format has been used for the derivation fields Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 5 10 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking If an operator wants to create a new record using a template whic
244. n Systems Inc See notice on first page 9 12 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Authority Control Table 9 5 Proposed New Heading Information Displayed Column Description Authorized States whether the heading is an authorized Heading Affected Authority Headings Any items that display below the new heading are the other affected authority headings see Figure 9 8 and Table 9 6 such as a 5XX or in the case of a subdivision change a 1XX Depending on the changes being made there may or may not be any affected authority headings to be changed That is no affected authority headings may display in the dialog box u Heading Old Operator Process B EEA Heading a demo 11 11 98 09 26 PM iert ee Process Heading New Bibs Authorized eer mal heats g Yes ina Gearch saan an Preview SA tba Coma ay aaah eel 5XX 52592 Experimental theater Delete Figure 9 8 Level Three of Tree Authority Headings outlined Table 9 6 Authority Headings Information Displayed Column Description Hdg Type Specifies the type of heading that contains the heading being changed Auth ID The authority record ID 1XX Heading Specifies the authorized heading Splitting a Heading You may want to split a heading such as vaccine and vaccination If 90 percent of the records will be vaccine it might be a good idea to complete Global Change for 100 percent of the records and change
245. n WebVoyage for a particular link you must have a separate 856 field that refers to an image file that displays before any of the other 856 fields in the MARC record The only types of links that may cause thumbnails to display are links to server files scandoc links and HTTP links A file only has a unique thumbnail image display in OPAC if it is a still image file such asa gif file a bmp file or a scandoc document which is a still image If the link leads toa AVI MOV MPG PDF TXT or WAV file or to a URL link a generic thumbnail is supplied See the Voyager WebVoyage User s Guide for more information 856 Field Links To include a World Wide Web or other linked resource in a bibliographic record use the 856 field with the following subfields tu The Universal Resource Locator URL The following is an example of 856 fields in a MARC record specifying URLs 856 tu http www akc org 856 4 tu http www whitehouse gov 856 7 3 Table of Contents 2 HTTP tu http lcweb loc gov cardir toc Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 20 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating The subfield 2 and string HTTP indicates that the link is an HTTP type link when thumbnails are generated in OPAC If this is used the URL thumbnail image displays in OPAC in the thumbnails column The 856 containing the thumbnail must be the first 856 field listed in the MARC record
246. n both a high and a low level for each tag table format For example in the Bmarcfix cfg file of the RLIN directory the 490 stanza provides details about the 490 field of bibliographic records including valid subfields and their values Stanzas That Reference Other Stanzas Stanzas in the tag tables can also reference other stanzas ones that provide more detail about particular fields subfields or templates For example in the Bmarcfix cfg file of the MARC21 directory the 007Code stanza defines the possible values for the 007 fixed field of bibliographic records This stanza includes the templates used for each possible value such as subfield a for Maps uses the 007_Map template Since the 007Code stanza references the Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page A 6 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode MARC Tag Tables 007_Maps template and that template is not defined in the 007Code stanza there must be another stanza in the Bmarcfix cfg file called 007 Map This stanza provides the details about that particular template type NOTE Stanzas that are referenced by other stanzas can be located either directly after the stanza that references them or all together at the end of a configuration file Stanza Components In Figure A 6 there are three sample stanzas taken from the Hmarx0xx cfg file of the MARC21 tag table format These stanzas outline the 014 linkage number field of holdings records
247. n first page 3 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records The fields entered are different for each record type For more information see Bibliographic Records on page 2 3 see Authority Records on page 2 28 see Holdings Records on page 2 36 or see Item Records on page 2 56 Result A New Record is saved to the database NOTE When adding a Bibliographic record it is important to remember that the assigned Owning Library is the Owning Library of the Cataloging location the user logs in with For more details on Owning Libraries see the Voyager System Administration User s Guide The procedure for creating a holdings record when a bibliographic record is open is shown in Procedure 3 2 Creating a Holdings Record When a Bibliographic Record is Open on page 3 5 Procedure 3 2 Creating a Holdings Record When a Bibliographic Record is Open Use the following to create a holdings record when a bibliographic record is open Select Record gt Create Holdings or click the Create Holdings button see Figure 3 6 Result A new holdings record displays for the active bibliographic record see Figure 3 7 if you have selected a default template in Cataloging s Session Defaults and Preferences Folders Files Tab Figure 10 6 on page 10 12 If you have not selected a default template the Create Holdings button opens the Select Holdings Template dialog box allowing you to navigate
248. n first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Table 2 11 Possible Statuses Listed According to Rank Missing The item has been labeled missing accord ing to library policies May be manually assigned At bindery The item has been sent to the bindery This status can only be assigned manually Charged Currently charged to a patron with a future due date Automatically assigned Renewed Currently charged to a patron for an addi tional period with a future due date Auto matically assigned Overdue Currently charged to a patron with a past due date but not yet lost or stolen Auto matically assigned On Hold An item is on a hold shelf waiting for the patron who placed a recall hold request for the item Automatically assigned In Transit An item is en route from one location to another May be manually assigned In Transit Dis charged A courtesy discharge has taken place and the item is now on its way home Automati cally assigned In Transit On Hold An item is en route to a hold shelf at a loca tion selected by the requesting patron Automatically assigned Recall Request One or more patrons have placed a request for an item currently charged to another patron a recall request can shorten the loan interval in effect Automat ically assigned Hold Request One or more patrons have placed a request for
249. n with more than 100 search results Table 3 6 describes the Headings List Table 3 6 Headings List dialog box Name Type Description Font Drop down Select the font used to display text in the Headings List list box NOTE The Headings List list box displays the Unicode character set Unlabeled column identifying if there are References Ref Notes Notes as well as Scope Notes Narrower terms See and or See Also reference s Bibs Column The number corresponds to the number of biblio graphic records associated with this heading Heading Column Name of the Heading returned Heading Type Column Type of heading returned OK Button Active once a heading is selected Opens the titles list Cancel Button Closes the Headings List Search Button Opens the Search dialog box Authority Button Opens the Reference Information dialog box Active if there is a Ref Note Reference or Note and so on See Reference Information Dialog Box on page 3 43 Clear All Button Clears the highlighted headings NOTE Not active with a Browse search Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 42 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Table 3 6 Headings List dialog box Name Type Description Copy Button For browse searches only clicking the Copy button copies the contents of the current heading into the clip board w
250. n your keyboard to navigate within the drop down menu From within a drop down menu you can enter the letter or number that precedes a particular selection For instance if you want to jump from subfield z within the drop down menu to subfield a you can simply press the letter a 007 Physical Description a Map C YideoRecording 1 Unspeciied I Notated Music C Remote Sensing Imag o C Microform C Nonprojected Graphic B Model Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Multicolored Paper A l Not applicable Photocopy Positive Figure 2 31 007 Physical Description dialog with grid displayed NOTE Provided you have entered and applied values for the tab you do not have to click the New button the next time you select that particular tab Rather the tab displays in grid format with the values you selected 4 Update a category Complete the fields and click the Apply button This will make the change s to the current display 5 Delete a category Click the Delete button 6 Exit the 007 Field display Click the Close or Esc buttons Any changes you have made will not be saved unless the Apply or Delete buttons were clicked Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 41 Holdings 008 Fixed Field The 008 is a header in the main record used to describe the main format in the Leader The 008
251. nce This term displays if the heading is not an authorized heading but is a see from reference from the 4XX fields Auth Ref This term displays if the heading is in the 1XX in an authority record and has references 5XX fields in that same record and or is itself a cross reference in another authority record Note This term displays if the heading s authority record contains scope notes Right clicking the word Note opens the Note dialog box The label that displays before the text that is the word Note or Search Under is the scope note label The scope note label may be edited The Reference Information dialog box displays its information in order of the type of reference To retrieve information about one of the references select the appropriate reference and click the Retrieve button Users can click the Cancel button to close the Reference Information dialog box and return to the Headings List at any time Scope Notes Retrieve the scope notes for the heading by selecting it and clicking the Retrieve button see Figure 3 39 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 44 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Notes For War Search Also Under subdivision Warfare under ethnic groups also subdivision Wars under ethnic groups and individual wars battles etc e g RussoJapanese War 1904 1905 United States History Queen Anne
252. ne C Logan Gene A Gene Adams 1922 Book McKinney Illustrated by Philip J Yan Yoorst AWNIIUINUAL Neuromechanical basis of kinesiology Roger M Enoka Roger M 1949 Book xl Cancel Search SelectAll Clear All MARC 22 Records Found Search Keyword kinesiology Figure 3 30 Titles Index dialog box after performing a free text keyword search Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 35 5 Highlight the title you want and select one of the buttons on the Titles Index dialog box See Titles Index list box on page 3 33 for information on the Titles Index dialog box Result If you clicked the OK button the MARC tab of the selected record s displays see Figure 3 31 7 Bib 32509 Kinesiology scientific basis of human motion Kathryn Luttge loj x System History Leader O0833pam 42200253 a 4510 006 005 ooz 008 811203 s 1982 ___ paua be 00 0 Seng Tag 12 Subfield Data o10 020 035 040 049 050 082 100 245 250 260 ann gt gt o0 o ta 81053074 ta 0030583586 ta ocm08034029 ta DLC te DLC td SHC ta SHCM ta QP303 th L687 1982 ta 6124 76 219 ta Luttgens Kathryn d 1926 ta Kinesiology tb scientific basis of human motion tc Kathryn Luttgens Katharine F Wells ta 7th ed ta Philadelphia tb Saunders College Pub tc c1982 tay RSRn thill te 24 o
253. nformation Spine Any additional item information that displays on the spine label Note Any note that relates to the item up to 910 characters Item Details You can add to or change the following information by entering the appropriate text Table 2 10 Item Record Detail Options Field Name Description Barcode The item s barcode if any This can be one active and possibly several inactive barcodes in a drop down list NOTE Pressing either F4 or the ellipses button brings up the Barcodes dialog box from which you can add or delete barcodes The F4 button does not bring up the Barcodes dialog box if the item record is new and has not yet been saved to the database Likewise the ellipses button is disabled if the record is new and has not yet been saved to the database If you click inside another field before pressing F4 the Barcodes dialog box does not display Copy The copy number if any Pieces The number of pieces that go with the item Price The item price If no price is assigned and replace ment costs are designated to be calculated for lost items the default replacement for the item type is used Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 59 Statuses 2 60 Each item record has a status field that describes the item s state of being such as checked out or damaged If more than one s
254. ng To identify a holdings record as using the Cambridge Main classification scheme the following for example can be specified 852 7 tb CAT h S 250 c 200 16 2 cammain This example uses a combination of first indicator 7 and subfield 2 2 to identify the classification scheme The first indicator or the first indicator in combination with a subfield in the MARC 21 Format for Holdings Data MFHD identifies which classification scheme is to be used for formatting the call number for storage in Voyager Call Number Searching and Display Results Voyager normalizes the content of the search text entered for a call number index search Similar to the process used when storing call number information Voyager evaluates the search content to determine if the call number fits the LC classification scheme the Dewey Decimal classification scheme and so on It then processes the normalized search content against the normalized call number field to generate a list of results NOTE The classification schemes utilized by a library are identified and stored in the system at implementation time and in general are not changed Additionally at implementation time the processing order of the classifications schemes is specified Typically the LC classification scheme is identified as the first classification Voyager checks when processing a call number However for libraries using other classification schemes more commonly the more commonl
255. ng Policy Definitions in the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for the Cataloging location selected when you log in Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 10 10 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Session Defaults and Preferences Figure 10 5 Session Defaults Item Defaults tab Table 10 4 Item Defaults tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Item Type Select the default Item Type to display when creating item records This defaults to the selection made in Cataloging Policy Definitions in Voyager System Administration for the location you selected when logging in to the Cataloging module This is a required field Temp Loc Select the default Temp Loc to display when creating item records Temp Type Select the default Temp Type to display when creating item records Status Select the default Status to display when creating item records Stat category Select the default Stat Category to display when creating item records Enum Enter the default Enum to display when creating item records Chron Enter the default Chron to display when creating item records Year Enter the default Year to display when creating item records Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 11 Table 10 4 Item Defaults tab opti
256. ng the records NOTE The ability to relink an item to a different holdings in the Record menu is disabled if the system focus is not on a item record from the database Unlinking Holdings and Bib Records With the Cataloging module you can unlink a holdings record from multiple bibliographic records in order to eliminate a bound with situation NOTE This command is only available when a holdings record that is attached to multiple bibs is the active record The procedure for unlinking holdings and bibliographic records is shown in Procedure 3 20 Unlinking Holdings and Bib Records on page 3 82 Procedure 3 20 Unlinking Holdings and Bib Records 3 82 1 Use the following to unlink holdings and bibliographic records Select Record gt Unlink holding from bibliographic Result The Linked Bib Records dialog box opens Select the bibliographic ID that you want to unlink the holdings record from Result The bibliographic ID is displayed in the title bar of the bibliographic record Click OK or click Cancel Result This unlinks the bibliographic record from the holdings record or closes the dialog box without unlinking the records Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records NOTE The ability to unlink an item from a holdings in the Record menu is disabled if the system focus is not on a item record from the da
257. nicode 10 9 Table 10 3 Work Flow tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Sequence new items at top Use this option when creating a new item record to tell the server to add the new item at the top of the sequence instead of the bottom of the sequence Sequence new e items at top Use this option when creating a new e item record to tell the server to add the new e item at the top of the sequence instead of the bottom of the sequence Check for Duplicate Item Barcodes Use this option to specify that when the user adds an item record or a barcode to an existing item the software checks if the barcode is already used in other items If so the user receives a warning and has the option to cancel the add item or the add barcode operation or to save it anyway If this is unchecked the software does not check for the pres ence of duplicate barcodes Suppress confirmation message upon successful save Select this check box to suppress the confirmation message that displays after a record has been successfully saved to the database Item Defaults Tab Figure 10 5 Customize the options on the Item Defaults tab see Figure 10 5 to match your preferences using Table 10 4 for a description of each option These default settings affect what is displayed when creating item records The initial item type default is determined by the default settings see Catalogi
258. notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options oo Table 10 10 Record Menu Option Description Get Call Number from Bib Record Ctrl N Causes a bibliographic record call number to be automatically inserted into the 852h and 852i fields of a holdings record You do not need to have the bibliographic record to which the hold ings record is associated open only the holdings record Verify 856 links Ctrl K Verifies 856 links in the active record Validate heading Validates the current heading Save to Database Ctrl B Saves the active record to the database Save to Database and Save the active record to the database and then Close Ctrl Z closes the record Delete Deletes the active record Import Imports records into Voyager Cataloging History Displays information about an item record Item Menu The contents of the Item menu are shown in Table 10 11 This menu is only available when an item record is the active record Table 10 11 Item Menu Option Description View Status Displays status information that can be assigned Ctrl S to items View Statistics Displays statistical information that can be Ctrl T assigned to items View Notes Displays any notes associated with the item Ctrl N record View Barcodes Displays the Barcodes dialog box for adding or Ctrl A deleting barcodes from an i
259. o the tree structure These are the authority record headings that would be affected by the change This batch job creates the entries in the preview queue displaying any Authority records with 5XX fields When you view the Global Headings Queue you are able to select which changes are to be processed Each change and its corresponding updates are the result of an authority heading change After running the second batch job you can also view any bibs associated with this heading by highlighting the heading and clicking the Preview button This displays the changed heading and enables the Bib button which displays the complete record The top section of the Global Headings Change Queue only displays the old heading and the heading change Before you run the third batch job you must specify which changes you want to make by checking the Process box d Running the third batch job makes all of the changes to the bibliographic and or authority records that had the Process flag turned on in the Global Headings Queue dialog box Original Heading The first thing displayed when you open the global headings screen is the original heading See Figure 9 6 and Table 9 4 Voyager Cataloging olx Eile Process Record Display Options Help D6 6 eA A AEEA Global Headings Change amp Preview Queues M Theaters Hdg Type Auth ID 1x Headin 5XX 48367 Amateur theater aaa Figure 9 6 Level One of Tree Original Headin
260. ocation of the cursor prior to selecting the Print Label command different information automatically displays in the Print Labels dialog box Figure 4 5 See the sections Bibliographic Recordsand Holdings Recordsfor more information Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information Print Labels NB1215 Title Sculpture in concrete M5 Mfhd Id 5635 1968b Call Number NB1215 M5 1968b Figure 4 5 Print Labels dialog box 2 Mark the check box next to the type of label you want to print Spine Label or Piece Label Mark both check boxes to print both spine labels and piece labels 3 Add or edit information in the spine and piece label sections NOTE The system automatically adjusts the text on the screen to fit the information on the appropriate label 4 Enter the number of copies to be printed in the Number of Copies box You can select any number from 1 to 9999 5 Click the Print button to print the labels on the printer to which Windows is set to print Click the Clear button to remove all information from the spine and piece label sections Click the Close button to close the dialog box without printing the information NOTE Print Label will not send anything to the printer unless some data is typed in the dialog box in either section Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page Febr
261. ocedure 2 6 Deleting Row of Variable Field Information on page 2 18 Procedure 2 7 Deleting Characters of Variable Field Information Use the following to delete one or more characters of variable field information Click next to the character you want to delete Result The insertion point is positioned to the left of the character you want to delete Press the Delete key Result This deletes one character at a time of variable information Click Save to DB Result This updates the record in the database with the deletions Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 19 Displaying Attachments 856 Links and Tables of Contents in WebVoyage Voyager s WebVoyage module allows your institution to define what displays from your bibliographic holdings and item records In addition certain information can also be added to your bibliographic or holdings records which can be displayed in a special manner in WebVoyage Specifically you can define attachments for patrons to view in WebVoyage links to linked resources and Tables of Contents for bibliographic records Attachments To specify that certain documents images World Wide Web pages or other resources are available in the WebVoyage OPAC when a specific record is selected you must define the 856 field in a bibliographic record according to the MARC 21 standard In order for thumbnail images to display i
262. ocumentation on the barcode font to determine what start stop character must be used Changing Font Size To change the size of the font that the information is printing in you would enter the S action code where stands for the 2 digit size of the font before the information and the s action code after the information S24 F401 s If you do not enter the s action code after the information all subsequent information is printed with this new font size Inserting a Blank Line To insert an extra line of space between different lines of information on a printout you would enter the backslash action code on a line by itself between the different lines of information Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 21 Inserting a Tab To tab a piece of information over from the left margin you enter the T action code before the information The tab width that applies to this action code is specified after the TabWidth variable in the Print Options XXX stanza for that type of record Spine Label Field Codes Table 4 6 contains the list of Generic Field Codes 100 Series field codes The data for the 100 Series field codes is defined through the Voyager System Administration client application Table 4 6 Generic Field Codes 100 Series Data Displayed Code Current Date amp Time 100 Library Display Name 101 Library Name 102 Nuc Code
263. ode not found 7 10 9 Authority Control 9 1 Authority Validation dialog box 9 2 9 2 Global Headings Change Queue Tree Levels 9 6 9 3 Global Heading Change amp Preview Queues 9 7 9 4 Global Heading Preview Intial State 9 10 9 5 Global Change Preview Authorities Records 9 10 9 6 Level One of Tree Original Heading outlined 9 11 9 7 Level Two of Tree Proposed New Heading outlined 9 12 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page xvi February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Figures 9 8 Level Three of Tree Authority Headings outlined 9 13 10 Session Defaults and Menu Options 10 1 Cataloging Session Defaults and Preferences General tab 10 2 10 2 Session Defaults Validation tab 10 5 10 3 Invalid MARC21 Characters message when storing record 10 8 10 4 Session Defaults Work Flow tab 10 9 10 5 Session Defaults Item Defaults tab 10 11 10 6 Session Defaults Folders Files tab 10 12 10 7 Session Defaults Mapping tab 10 15 10 8 Session Defaults Colors Font tab 10 17 E A MARC Tag Tables A 1 Files and directories in the Voyager Catalog Tagtable directory A 2 A 2 Various configuration files tag tables in the MARC21 directory A 3 A 3 Cataloging format choices for MARC validation A 4 A 4 Sample report if MARC validation finds an error while saving a record to the database A 5 A 5 Sample comment area of a tag table A 6 A 6 Sample stanzas from the HmarcOxx cfg file for MARC21 format A 7 A
264. ographic record in Cata loging for selected documents F9 Creates 856 tags in a open bibliographic record in Cataloging for all documents Alt F8 Creates new bibliographic record in Cataloging for the values in Folder Name and creates 856 tags s for the selected docu ment s Alt F9 Creates a new bibliographic record in Cataloging for the val ues in Folder Name and creates 856 tags for all the docu ments in the folder Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 25 3 26 1a Phare Felder homie x Pavias Seat gt cztzteced Coles onz X Tille Suho ooo Edtion J Fubiseer J Flare Be cc Coleztion ite J Leng ag g Subec View Derne Hase Esisiieg F duovies Lis Batches phztzqrapy x icctrumant O42 naz ph i pari di sinanrd d de EPT ph t qrapy x irerumont O42 719 Imaz ee Use Ssaner Uvich Soch J ral gaz UK ggg gg gg ggg Figure 3 21 File Documents dialog box in ImageServer When the bibliographic record is created in Cataloging Figure 3 22 the information from the bibliographic template specified in Session Defaults is combined with the information from ImageServer to create the bibliographic record All of the information from both sources is entered into the record If there is no bibliographic template specified in Session Defaults Ca
265. ollowing to configure the Authority 008 field Click the 008 button see Figure 2 23 from an open authority record 008 Figure 2 23 008 Button Result The 008 General Description Authority dialog box see Figure 2 24 opens as a grid Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 31 008 General Description Authority D Not applicable ie E E Romanization Schen Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Language atalog Obsolete Code or Value Not Set a Established heading record c AACR 2 a Library of Congress Subject Headings F n Not applicable n Not applicable Appropriate a Appropriate b Not Appropriate Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolete Code or Value Not Set n Not applicable a Record can be used a Differentiated personal name a Fully established heading Figure 2 24 008 General Description Authority dialog box Select values from the grid by clicking a particular cell and then the down arrow to display drop down menu selections You must use either the mouse or the up and down arrows on your keyboard to move from cell to cell within the grid To use the latter first click in a particular cell and then use the up and down arrows to navigate from cell to cell Do not click the down arrow This causes you to browse the selections within a particular drop do
266. ollowing ways e Appended to an existing work record e To the same work folder as a new record e To a different work folder If the record was retrieved from the database use Save As to save the record to a work folder In addition if a record is saved to a work folder and then opened in another Cataloging session for a different database the record will overlay any existing record without any duplicate checking This is because Voyager automatically overlays any record with an identical 001 The correct procedure is to Import the record into another database Save to Database You can save a record to the database in the following ways e Select Record gt Save to Database e Click the Save to Database button Figure 4 3 e Press Ctrl B on your keyboard Ze Figure 4 3 Save to Database button In addition you can save a record to the database and then have the record automatically close by selecting Record gt Save to Database and Close or by pressing Ctrl Z on your keyboard If you are saving a record to the database via the Save to Database and Close function and a different process interrupts the Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 7 save and close such as Authority Validation or Duplicate Detection the record is closed once you elect to continue with the save provided that the save is successful In order to save a record to the database you n
267. on CUSTOMER may copy the printed documentation only in reasonable quantities to aid the employees in their use of the SOFTWARE Limited portions of documentation relating only to the public access catalog may be copied for use in patron instruction Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xxxi How to Comment on This Document Endeavor Information Systems Inc EISI has made every effort to ensure that this information product meets your needs EISI is interested in your comments and suggestions to improve this information product You may submit comments and suggestions on this and other EISI information and training products by way of e e mail e fax To Submit Comments by E mail To submit comments by e mail please send your message to docmanager endinfosys com To Submit Comments by Fax Please send feedback by fax with cover to the following From within the United States of America 847 296 5636 Attn Documentation Manager Customer Support Contact Information Phone xxxii The Endeavor Information Systems Inc Customer Support department provides technical assistance for all products You may contact Customer Support by phone e mail or fax To contact Customer Support by telephone please call From the United States and Canada 877 44 LLOYD 877 445 5693 From all other countries 800 4444 3474 Endeavor Information Systems Inc
268. ons for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Caption Enter the default Caption to display when creating item records Free text Enter the default Free text to display when creating item records Spine Enter the default Spine information to display when creating item records Copy Enter the default Copy number to display when creating item records Pieces Enter the default Pieces number to display when creating item records Folders Files Tab Figure 10 6 Customize the options on the Folders Files tab see Figure 10 6 to match your preferences using Table 10 5 for a description of each option Session Defaults and Preferences General Validation Work Flow ltem Defaults Folders Files Mapping Colors Fonts m Templates gt r Work Files Bib l Bib l gx Hidg l Hidg Auth fy Auth l w r Folders r Save to Local File wk SCs File c Save savefile eee Character Set Latin non Unicode x y Latin 1 non Unicode Import 4 MARC21 MARC 8 non Unicade MARC TUTF 8 OCLC non Unicode RLIN legacy non Unicode Voyager legacy non Unicode Cancel Figure 10 6 Session Defaults Folders Files tab Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 10 12 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Table 10 5 Folders Files tab options for Session Default
269. ord is saved to your database the title bar displays the bibliographic record ID After you have searched a remote database the last search settings defined on the Voyager Connection Options dialog box applies until you either change the remote search settings or exit the Cataloging module Thus if you want to perform a standard staff side search of your local database you must reset your search settings so that only your local database is searched Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 23 To do so open the Search dialog box and click Remote Press the Clear button located toward the center of the dialog box and then click Connect This connects you only to your local database In this case it is not necessary for your local database in the list of Available Locations to be selected as a Selected Location for this to work This is because your local database is the default database searched Invalid Records You cannot import records that are invalid from either a file or from a remote database This is because the system cannot import a record that it cannot read Generally speaking the system cannot read a MARC record if its length as defined in the record s first five bytes is incorrect or if there is a critical element missing in the record such as a field tag displays without a subfield delimiter If you encounter this situation you can opt to either fix the
270. ord tab opens see Keyword tab selections on page 3 31 for more information Select the wanted search option either the Boolean radio button or the Free Text radio button Enter your search term s or phrases Result The search can now be executed see Figure 3 29 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Keyword Non Kepword Builder History Boolean not using relevance FreeText using relevance Search for kinesiology Cancel Clear Limit Remote Go to Googte Figure 3 29 Completed Keyword tab 4 Select Do Search to execute the search Cancel to cancel the search Clear to delete the search terms or Limit to set limits for this search See Procedure 3 11 Setting Search Limits on page 3 56 Result If the search is performed the Titles Index dialog box displays see Figure 3 30 Titles Index Font Arial X gy and medicine for dance ININININI Kinesiology scientific basis of human motion Luttgens Kathryn 1926 Book Kathryn Luttgens Katharine F Wells ANNIINHINNIN Manual of structural kinesiology Clem W Thompson Clem W Book Thompson AIMINUNINN Applied kinesiology the scientific study of Jensen Clayne R Book human performance Clayne R Jensen Gordon W Schultz AWMIIUNINUL Kinesiology by Gene A Logan and Way
271. ords Select Bibliographic Template 21x Gtm Al J Figure 3 2 Selecting a template for a new record 2 Select the template you want to use and click Open If you have specified a template in your Session Defaults and Preferences this dialog box does not open Result The new record displays see Figure 3 3 with a minimal template that contains a Leader fixed fields and variable fields Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 3 Yoyager Cataloging File Edit Record Display Options Window Help New Open Save Search Headings Tites Saveto DB Mew E Get Hidgs New tems Get items Hierarchy 7 New Bib Record MARC Systen Leader 000r ZANTE DOs ST Tag H 12 Sublist Data gt Title Statement Figure 3 3 New bibliographic record template example NOTE You must select a template from the Select Bibliographic Template or Select Authority Template dialog box that corresponds with the type of record you elected to create For example if you elected to create an Authority record you can only choose a template for Authority records Otherwise you get the following error message see Figure 3 4 Voyager Cataloging Figure 3 4 Error message for selecting an inappropriate template 3 Complete the appropriate fields in the record and click Save Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice o
272. ords Select Record gt Retrieve Authorities Result The Select one or more authority records dialog box opens Figure 3 72 listing record numbers and names for all the authority records attached to the active bibliographic record Select one or more authority records Law Anglo Saxon Lodge Henry Cabot 1850 1924 Adams Henry 1838 1918 Laughlin J Laurence James Laurence 1850 1933 Cancel Figure 3 72 Select one or more authority records dialog box Select the record s that you want to view and click OK Click Cancel to close the dialog box without retrieving any records The procedure for retrieving items is shown in Procedure 3 17 Retrieve Items on page 3 77 Procedure 3 17 Retrieve Items Use the following to retrieve items Select Record gt Retrieve Items or click the Retrieve Items button Figure 3 73 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 77 3 78 Figure 3 73 Retrieve Items Button Result The Retrieve Items dialog box opens Figure 3 74 3 items found for holding 70382 TtemBacode Location Enum Cheon Copy em Barcode Lacan Ht Main P Main P Main P Koanta Dancel Move Save Eas View Holdings Clear Figure 3 74 Retrieve Items dialog box From this dialog box you can open the item record s open the respective holdings record or resequenc
273. ough the Cataloging module such as the following Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 27 e Search dialog box e Web server http POST e Line items Acquisitions in Cataloging e Holdings locations e Linking and Unlinking Records Search Dialog Box The Search dialog box see Figure 3 23 available in the Acquisitions Cataloging and Circulation modules provides a unique way to search your library s catalog as well as remote databases It contains four tabs e Keyword tab see Keyword Tab and Keyword Searching on page 3 30 e Non Keyword tab see Non Keyword Tab and Heading and Non Keyword Left Anchored Searching on page 3 36 e Builder tab see Builder Tab and Builder Searching on page 3 49 e History tab see History tab on page 3 53 Keyword Non Keyword Builder History Search by Find Title lt gt C Browse Heading Types Filter Locations Filter Search for Cancel Clear Limit Remote Go to Googte Figure 3 23 Search dialog box NOTE By default the Non Keyword tab displays when the Search dialog box opens To navigate between search tabs you can either click the appropriate tab or press the Alt key plus the letter underlined in the tab name Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 28 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Addition
274. our local database is listed Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Table 3 10 describes the Voyager Connection Options dialog box Table 3 10 Voyager Connection Options dialog box sections and fields Section Field Column Description Available Unnamed Column of check boxes to the left of Database Locations Name indicating whether or not the database has been added to Selected Locations Database Name The name of the database to which you can connect Type The type of database such as Bibliographic or Citation Connection The connection type for the database such as Voyager or 239 50 Selected Database Name Lists the databases by name that you have Locations selected for searching Information not used Describes the database highlighted in the list of about Available Locations Description is drawn from database the Database Definition work space in the name Voyager System Administration module The procedure for searching remote databases is shown in Procedure 3 12 Searching remote databases on page 3 61 Procedure 3 12 Searching remote databases Use the following to perform a bibliographic search of one or more remote databases 1 From the Search dialog box click the Remote button at the bottom right of the Search dialog box or press Alt R on your keyboard Result The
275. ouse to access a certain tab You define a keyboard shortcut via the ampersand amp symbol in the stanzas defining the various tabs of a fixed field grid See Figure A 7 The keyboard equivalents employ the Alt key plus a letter or number that you designate within the appropriate stanza The letter you designate as the keyboard equivalent is underlined in the Cataloging module on the corresponding tab NOTE The amp ampersand is stripped out of the string when it is displayed in the form title bar Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page A 12 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode MARC Tag Tables For instance instead of accessing the Books tab using the mouse you may want to use the Alt b keystroke To set this up you place an amp ampersand in front of the letter you want to use in combination with the Alt key in the appropriate Xmarcfix cfg file such as a amp Books as in Figure A 7 In the Cataloging module using this example the Books tab displays with B in Books underlined See Figure A 10 006 Additional Material Characteristics a Books E ou Figure A 10 Sample keyboard shortcut for the Books tab NOTE You can only designate one keyboard equivalent at a time If you define more than one only the last one will be used Stanzas in the Xmarcfix cfg Tag Tables There are three types of stanzas in each of the Xmarcfix cfg tag tables e Code type or tab stanzas e G
276. page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 3 NOTE When modifications are made to a specific configuration file it may also be necessary to make a corresponding change in the master cfg file in that folder Tag Tables and MARC Validation The tag tables are used in the Cataloging module to validate your MARC records as they are saved to the database The main configuration file master cfg can be edited to include or exclude authority bibliographic holdings or local files in the MARC validation process Certain fields can also be identified as mandatory validation checks for compliance with the OCLC RLIN and MARC21 formats The Cataloging module validates MARC records against one of three different tag tables formats OCLC RLIN or MARC21 These three formats display as options in Session Defaults and Preferences Cataloging formats See Figure A 3 If you do not want one or more of these formats available as MARC validation choices you can delete the directory from Voyager Catalog Tagtable and the Cataloging module does not display them as options Session Defaults and Preferences m General Validation Work Flow Item Defaults Folders Files Mapping Colors Fonts Cataloging formats Marc21 x IV Bypass MARC a i set validation ist all the error Rlin J Bypass Authority Control Validation J Bypass Decomposition of accented characters for MARC21 IV Display all the headings 856 link servers He
277. plate gt New from the menu Result The Create a New Record dialog box opens See Figure 5 4 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 5 Geate a New Record Select the record type 2fialifatee gis Cancel Figure 5 4 Create a New Record dialog box Select the record type Bibliographic Authority or Holdings from the drop down menu and click OK Result The system template for the record type you selected displays Create the new template by completing the leader fixed fields and variable fields For more information about the leader fixed and variable fields see the Voyager Cataloging User s Guide Select File gt Save As from the menu Enter the name you want for your template The extension for the file must be tem For example thesis tem NOTE When a template is saved it is not validated against authority records or the MARC tag table The procedure for editing a template is shown in Procedure 5 2 Editing a Template on page 5 6 Procedure 5 2 Editing a Template 5 6 Use the following to edit a template Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking 1 Select File gt Template gt Edit from the menu Result The Open Template File dialog box opens See Figure 5 5 Open Template Fi
278. r buttons And Or or Not then repeat steps 3 5 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 51 Result The row of search terms displays in the pane below the Search In field NOTE The Boolean operator does not display in the row until you enter another search term and click an additional Boolean operator button to be used with the next search term if you enter another Figure 3 48 shows a search using multiple search terms in combination with the following e All three options for relationships between terms any all phrase e Various Search In fields Title the default Keyword Anywhere Subject and Author Name e Two Boolean operators AND and OR Keyword Non Keyword Builder History Search for l ary of these Search in Author Name x And Or Not lake AND effect in Title AND Edit lake michigan AND snow OR rain OR weather in Subject OR smith in Author Name Delete Cancel Clear Limit Figure 3 48 Builder tab with multiple search terms and relationships OPTIONAL 6 Edit any row of search terms by clicking the row then the Edit button then repeating steps 3 5 Delete any row of search terms by clicking the row then clicking the Delete button Delete the entire pane by clicking the Clear button Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 52 February 2004 Voyager
279. r detail to include screen shots advanced topics and cross references to other user s guides and topics Conventions Most conventions used in the Voyager documentation are Windows standard conventions For more information about these conventions please refer to your Windows documentation Commands Voyager functions and activities are accessed primarily through the menu and sub menu options To designate which menus and sub menus are being referred to in the user s guides and online help we have adopted a convention of specifying the menu sub menu and function or activity For example referring to the Exit activity on the File menu is specified as File gt Exit Ellipsis Button The Ellipsis button see Figure 1 1 indicates that additional information is available either in a dialog box or in an expanded textbox Click the ellipsis button to access this additional function or information Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 1 2 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Getting Started Figure 1 1 Ellipsis Button Keyboard Functions Some functions listed on Voyager menus have corresponding keyboard equivalents In addition certain functions are assigned keyboard shortcuts Both types of keyboard access are described below Keyboard equivalents and shortcuts are indicated on the menus Keyboard equivalents allow you to perform activities without requiring you to use the mou
280. r uses 852 first indicator values 0 3 7 and 8 as defined in the MARC 21 Format for Holdings Data See Table B 1 for a detailed list of 852 first indicator values Table B 1 852 first indicator values 1st Indicator Value Description blank No information provided Blank also indicates not indexed Library of Congress LC classification Dewey Decimal classification National Library of Medicine NLM classification Superintendent of Documents SuDOC classification Source specified in subfield 2 COV NI WwW N gt O Other scheme Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode B 1 Additionally non standard values c and u are used by Voyager See Table B 2 Table B 2 852 first indicator non standard values 1st Indicator Value Description c Canadian Commissioner of Documents CACODOCS classification u Universal Decimal Classification UDC Several subfield 2 codes used in combination with first indicator 7 are implemented in Voyager 2001 1 These codes identify the rules for sorting and normalizing call numbers for different classification schemes See Table B 3 for a list of these codes Table B 3 Subfield 2 Codes 2 Codes Description cacodoc Canadian documents oldyale Old Yale classification udc Universal Decimal Classific
281. raphic authority or holdings record Currently you cannot print item records Even though some fixed fields do not display the information on the screen the printout will contain a printed description of that field To print a record select File gt Print Record from the main menu Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 13 Printing Labels You can print spine and piece labels by selecting File gt Print Label A spine label can be an attachment on an item for shelving purposes A piece label can be an attachment to an item for general identification purposes Spine and piece labels can be customized You can create separate spine and piece templates from bibliographic holding item and serial records The templates are defined in the file spinelabel cfg which is located in the Misc subdirectory The default settings are as follows the size of a spine label is 1 5 8 high by 9 10 wide The size of a piece label is 1 5 8 high by 2 9 10 wide However this may be changed by your institution See the section Spine and Piece Label Print Template for information on customizing labels The procedure for printing spine and piece labels is shown in Procedure 4 8 Print Spine and Piece Labels on page 4 14 Procedure 4 8 Print Spine and Piece Labels 4 14 Use the following to print spine and piece labels Select File gt Print Label Result Depending on the l
282. rd on page 3 8 for details on opening records Result The record opens See Figure 3 66 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 71 3 72 Le TORT RE Oe Pere TEPER ET POR ee File Edit Record RelatedRecords Display Options Window Help 2 Search Headings Titles Save to DB 2223S Mew Hidgs Get Hides Mew Items Get tems T Hierarchy Help z Bib 29442 Baskets of rural America Gloria Roth Teleki MARC System History Leader NN7ANcam onMAaaAN IN Soy 008 751124 s 1975 nyu a____b___oo H 12 Gubtied Data i ta 75010075 Ja 0525061401 fo 12 50 Ja 0525474099 tb pbk fa ocm01866 679 ta DLC te DLC td m c td SHO fa n us ta SHOM qa TTS79 B3 fb T441975 fa 746 47 ta Tebki Gloria Roth 4 fa The baskets of rural America tc Gloria Roth Teleki ta isiad Ja New York tb Dutton to 1975 E a nan ve ann Library Of Congress Control Number 11 49AM__4 Figure 3 66 Example of a bib record opened for using Acq in the Cat Select Record gt View Line Items in Acquisitions see Figure 3 66 or use the Ctrl M keystroke Depending on whether the number of line items associated with the record the result will be different Result Line items open through Acq in the Cat function Once the line item is up in the Acquisitions module you can vi
283. record NOTE You cannot delete a bibliographic record that has holdings records attached to it and you cannot delete a holdings record that has item records attached to it You also cannot delete a record that has other transactions pending against it This includes records that are checked out to patrons in the Circulation module or purchase orders in the Acquisitions module When you delete a record it is saved on the server in a file called delete lt recordtype gt marc where lt recordtype gt is the type of record being deleted either bib mfhd or auth For example if you delete a bibliographic record it is saved in the file delete bib marc To access the deleted files on the server contact your system administrator When item records are deleted key pieces of item information are automatically archived in a log file called item delete This file is intended for audit and statistical purposes If necessary this file may be used to manually recreate items in Voyager Adding a URL to an 856 Field You can automatically insert an 856 field with a URL in it into your record Voyager automatically adds the URL on view in your web browser into a new 856 field in the record currently open in Cataloging If you do not run Netscape or Explorer this function may not work properly Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 3 The procedure for adding a URL to
284. references from the menu bar Voyager Cataloging File Record Display Options Help Preferences V Toolbar Toolbar Text Toolbar Tips v Status Bar Figure 5 14 Menu bar in the Cataloging module Result The Session Default and Preferences dialog box opens See Figure 5 9 Click the Folders Files tab Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 23 5 24 Result The dialog box displays the Folders and Files options See Figure 5 10 In the Folders section enter the entire path to the desired folder in the Template field For example c voyager catalog template You can also click the ellipsis button Result The Select Directory dialog box opens See Figure 5 15 Please select a directory as your preferred templates folder Directories Cancel C Woyager Access Reports E Catalog Circulation E Misc x M Create new subdirectory m Figure 5 15 Select Directory dialog box The Select Directory dialog box should default to the Voyager directory If not you can browse your PCs hard drive by double clicking the c in the Directory drop down list Use the Drives drop down list to change drives if your default folder resides on a drive other than c Double click the Catalog folder in the Voyager directory to expand it and display the contents There are three stan
285. rid template stanzas e Drop down menu selection stanzas NOTE The order and the structure of these stanzas is hierarchical The code type stanzas define what tabs display for fixed fields in the Cataloging module The Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 13 grid template stanzas define the grid that displays once you select a tab for a fixed field The drop down menu stanzas define the selections you have on a particular grid Code Type Tab Stanzas 00xCode A 14 Code types essentially define what tabs display in the Cataloging module for each fixed field To access these tabs you click the Leader 006 007 or 008 buttons from the MARC tab of an authority bibliographic or holdings record Remember that holdings records do not have 006 field and authority records do not have 006 or 007 fields For example if you click the 007 button on the MARC tab of a bibliographic record the tab selections as illustrated in Figure A 11 display based on what is defined in the MARC tag tables in the Bmarcfix cfg file 007 Physical Description a Map m Figure A 11 Code types tabs that display in the Cataloging module for a bibliographic record Once you select a tab from the Cataloging module and click the New button a grid displays with all the possible values for that particular tab code type Types of Code Type Tab Stanzas There are four st
286. rint Template Spine Item 111 Name B F102 b 112 Addrl U F510 u 113 Bib Id F200 114 Author F203 115 Chron F403 116 Caption F405 117 Free Text F406 118 Enumeration F402 119 Item Id F400 120 Year F404 121 Copy Number F407 122 Pieces 123 Price 124 Spine Label 125 Item Barcode F401 126 Item Type Code 127 Item Type 128 Item Type Display 129 Item Location Code 130 Item Location Display Name 131 Item Location Figure 4 9 Sample label print template file Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 4 28 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information Line 132 Media Type 133 Media Type Code 134 1 35 Print Template Piece Item 136 Name B F102 b 137 Addr1 U F510 u 138 Bib Id F200 139 Author F203 140 Chron F403 141 Caption F405 142 Free Text F406 143 Enumeration F402 144 Item Id F400 145 Year F404 146 Copy Number F407 147 Pieces 148 Price 149 Spine Label 150 151 152 tem Barcode F401 tem Type Code tem Type 154 155 156 157 Media Type 158 Media Type Code 159 tem Location Code tem Location Display Name I I I 153 Item Type Display F I I tem Location 160 Print Options Serial Issue 161 StandardFont Time
287. rks and ActiveX is a trademark of the Microsoft corporation in the United States and or other countries Unicode and the Unicode logo are registered trademarks of Unicode Inc Google is a trademark of Google Inc Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page Contents EO About This Document e Purpose xxvii e Intended Audience xxvii e Reason for Reissue xxvii e How to Use This Document xxviii e Conventions Used in This Document Xxix e Contact Information XXX e Document Reproduction Photocopying xxxi e How to Comment on This Document xxxii To Submit Comments by E mail xxxii To Submit Comments by Fax xxxii e Customer Support Contact Information xxxii Phone xxxii E mail xxxiii Fax xxxiii Customer Support Hours of Operation xxxiii EEE gy 1 Getting Started e Introduction 1 1 e Purpose of this Chapter 1 1 e Prerequisite Skills and Knowledge 1 1 e Before You Begin 1 2 Documentation and Online Help 1 2 Conventions 1 2 Commands 1 2 Ellipsis Button 1 2 Keyboard Functions 1 3 Logging into Cataloging 1 4 Exiting Cataloging 1 5 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode iii Contents 2 Record Types and Creating e Introduction 2 1 e Types of Records 2 1 Record Relationships 2 2 Fields 2 2 e Bibliographic Records 2 3 MARC Tab 2 3 Bibliographic Leader 2 4 Bibliographic 005 Fixed Field 2 6 Bibliographic 006 Fixed Field 2 6 Biblio
288. s SSSSSSSaaz 1 Getting Started 1 1 Logging into Cataloging 1 4 2 Record Types and Creating 2 1 Viewing the Bibliographic Leader 2 4 2 2 Editing the 006 Field 2 6 2 3 Editing the 007 Field 2 9 2 4 Editing the 008 Field 2 12 2 5 Adding and Editing Variable Fields 2 16 2 6 Deleting Row of Variable Field Information 2 18 2 7 Deleting Characters of Variable Field Information 2 19 2 8 Configuring the Authority Leader 2 29 2 9 Configuring the Authority 008 Field 2 31 2 10 Adding a Tag to the Grid 2 33 2 11 Deleting a Tag 2 33 2 12 Configuring the Holdings Leader 2 38 2 13 Configuring the Holdings 007 Fixed Field 2 39 2 14 Configuring the Holdings 008 Fixed Field 2 42 2 15 Adding Variable Fields 2 44 2 16 Setting the Call Number Hierarchy 2 46 2 17 Getting Call Number from Bibliographic Record 2 48 2 18 Assigning a Status 2 63 2 19 Assigning Statistical Categories 2 64 De 3 Creating Opening and Viewing Records 3 1 Creating a New Record 3 2 3 2 Creating a Holdings Record When a Bibliographic Record is Open 3 5 3 3 Creating an Item Record from an Active Holdings Record 3 8 3 4 Opening a Work Record 3 9 3 5 Importing Records From a File 3 12 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode xxiii Procedures 3 6 Importing Records From Another Database 3 15 3 7 Performing a bibliographic keyword search 3 34 3 8 Non Keyword searching 3 47 3 9
289. s Work Flow Tab Figure 10 4 on page 10 8 From this dialog box you can do the following e Retrieve the existing holdings record by clicking the Retrieve button e Create a new one by clicking the New button e Cancel by clicking the Cancel button IMPORTANT If the Cataloging user is not allowed to attach a Holdings record to an Owning Library the Owning Library of the location in the 852 b field is Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 7 checked against the Owning Library of the linked Bibliographic record Then if the Owning Libraries are different a message is displayed in Cataloging and the user is barred from saving the Holdings record This check is only performed if the Location is a valid Location for the user s login For more details on Owning Libraries see the Voyager System Administration User s Guide The procedure for creating an item record from an active holdings record is shown in Procedure 3 3 Creating an Item Record from an Active Holdings Record on page 3 8 Procedure 3 3 Creating an Item Record from an Active Holdings Record Use the following to create an item record from an active holdings record 1 Select Record gt Create Items or click the Create Item button see Figure 3 8 Result A default Item record opens 5 Figure 3 8 Create Item Button 2 Complete the appropriate fields and click Save Result
290. s Dewey call numbers that have more than one decimal point as well as call numbers that only have a decimal point after the Dewey root Cutter combination such as D255 2F K88 v 3 B985 DUN B In order to add or edit in the Variable Fields grid you must first place your cursor in that grid To do this position and click your mouse in the Variable Fields portion of the record The procedure for adding variable fields is shown in Procedure 2 15 Adding Variable Fields on page 2 44 Procedure 2 15 Adding Variable Fields 2 44 Use the following to add variable fields Select Edit gt Insert Field Before F3 or Edit gt Insert Field After F4 to add a tag to the grid Select the Tag cell by clicking in the cell under Tag heading Type the tag or press F2 to select a valid tag from the Cataloging Tips scroll box The tag displays in the cell Select an indicator by clicking in the indicator cell Type the indicator or press F2 to select a valid indicator from the Cataloging Tips scroll box A number representing the indicator displays in the indicator cell Select the Bibliographic Data cell Press F9 to insert a subfield delimiter in the cell Enter the subfield or press F2 to select a valid subfield from the Cataloging Tips scroll box Enter the subfield data If necessary click the ellipse box to expand the data cell Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Recor
291. s New Roman 162 StandardFontSize 12 163 AlternateFont Arial 164 AlternateFontSize 12 Figure 4 9 Sample label print template file Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 29 Line 165 Copies 1 166 TabWidth 1 167 Margin 0 05 168 SpineLabelHeight 1 625 169 SpineLabelWidth 9 170 PieceLabelHeight 1 625 171 PieceLabelWidth 2 9 172 173 Print Template Spine Serial Issue 174 Name B F102 b 175 Addr1l U F510 u 176 Component Name F600 177 Enum Chron F601 178 Receipt Date F602 179 180 Print Template Piece Serial Issue 181 Name B F102 b 182 Addrl U F510 u 183 Component Name F600 184 Enum Chron F601 185 Receipt Date F602 186 Figure 4 9 Sample label print template file Closing a Record You can close the active record by selecting File gt Close This command closes the current record If changes have been made to the record since it was last saved you will be asked to save the changes or close without saving them You can also close all of the records that you have open by selecting File gt Close All Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 4 30 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking Contents Introduction 5 1 e Displaying Related Records 5 1 e Templates 5
292. s and Preferences Options Description Templates In the Templates block you can enter a template name with or e Bib without an extension in the appropriate box Bibliographic Hidg Authority Holdings Voyager looks for that template in the correct working directory when you choose to create a new e Auth record You can also enter the entire path for the appropriate template or click the ellipses to select the template you want from the appropriate directory The filename may have any extension However if the file selected is not the required type of template Voyager displays an error message The filename must refer to an existing file NOTE A file path can only be specified in the Templates block if there is one template as opposed to multiple templates defined for each record type Folders In the Folders block you can enter or select a default folder so e Work that when you open a work record and or template and import a e T record the Open dialog box defaults to the specified folder emplate e Import Work Files In the Work Files block you can enter the names of the files to e Bib which you want your records automatically saved when you use e Hidg the Save or Save As feature If you enter a filename in a field ae er you will not be prompted for a filename when saving records of that type You can specify a different file for bibliographic hold ings and item records If you enter a filename a record will be
293. s box Once a status is applied to an item it is no longer available in the Status List To delete the status highlight the appropriate status in Status box and click the red down arrow see Figure 2 46 The status returns to the Status List drop down list Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 63 m Figure 2 46 Blue Up and Red Down Buttons 3 Click the OK button to save the item statuses you ve added or deleted and close the Item Status dialog box Statistical Categories For statistical purposes a site can define types of item characteristics that are not needed for cataloging but are useful for statistical compilations The statistical categories are not associated with any one item type and there is no limit on the number created When an operator creates a item record and assigns the item type an operator can select one or more statistical categories from the list The Statistical Categories button is shown in Figure 2 47 Figure 2 47 Statistical Categories Button Item Statistical Categories are defined from System Administration and can only be assigned manually NOTE You can only view item statistical categories when an item record is the active record The procedure for assigning Statistical Categories is shown in Procedure 2 19 Assigning Statistical Categories on page 2 64 Procedure 2 19 Assigning Statistical Categori
294. s holdings record number and the definition for valid value 1 is bibliographic record number The definition for valid value 0 is undefined for indicator 2 of the 014 field In the Cataloging module when you press F2 and your cursor is in the appropriate indicator field the values entered in this component display Xmarcfix cfg Tag Tables There are three Xmarcfix cfg tag tables e Amarcfix cfg e Bmarcfix cfg e Hmarcfix cfg These files define the valid values for the fixed fields of authority bibliographic and holdings records for each tag table format OCLC RLIN and MARC21 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 9 Sample Xmarcfix cfg Tag Table Figure A 7 is an example of one the Xmarcfix cfg tag tables Specifically this is an example of a Bmarcfix cfg tag table 006Code a amp Books 006 Books c P amp rinted Music 006 Music d Manuscr amp ipt Music 006 Music e Prin gted Map 006 Maps f Manuscript Map 006 Maps g amp Projected Medium 006 Visual i amp Nonmusical Sound 006 Music j Musical S ound 006 Music k amp 2 D Nonprojectable 006 Visual m Computer amp File 006 Computer o amp Kit 006 Visual p Mi amp xed Material 006 Mixed r amp 3 D Artifact 006 Visual s amp Serial Control 006 Serials t Manuscript amp Lang 006 Books Figure A 7 Sample Bmarcfix cfg file stanza from the new MARC tag tables A CA
295. s only exists with other statuses and takes on the rank of the other status Damaged The item has been damaged according to library policies May be manually assigned This status only exists with other statuses and takes on the rank of the other status Withdrawn The item has been withdrawn from the cir culating collection May be manually assigned This status only exists with other statuses and takes on the rank of the other status The procedure for assigning a status is shown in Procedure 2 18 Assigning a Status on page 2 63 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 62 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Procedure 2 18 Assigning a Status Use the following to assign a status to an item 1 Select ltem gt View Status The Item Status dialog box opens see Figure 2 45 Item Status pe 411200702912 Date Applied At Bindery Cataloging Review Circulation Review Figure 2 45 Item Status dialog box There are two areas displayed for status information the actual applied Status box and the Status List which contain the possible statuses The number if any which displays at the top of the dialog box is the barcode assigned to the current item 2 To apply a status select the appropriate status from the Status List drop down list and click the blue up arrow see Figure 2 46 The status displays in the Statu
296. se Keyboard equivalents are indicated by an underlined letter in the name of a menu or function To access a menu or function using keyboard equivalents press the alternate key Alt followed by the underlined letter For example to exit a Voyager module press and release the Alt key followed by the f key for the File menu followed by the x key for Exit A number of functions are also assigned keyboard shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts allow you to press and hold the control key Ctrl and then press the designated letter For example when the Save command is available you can press and hold the Ctrl key followed by the s key for Save Following Windows conventions the tab key Tab can be used to move the cursor to fields and buttons within dialog boxes and windows Press and hold the Shift key and then press the Tab key to move the cursor in the opposite direction through the dialog box The F4 function key or F8 in some instances can be used to display drop down arrow selections These keys can also be used to display fields represented by ellipsis button In addition items listed in drop down menus can be scrolled through by typing the first letter of the item that you want to display To scroll through additional items that begin with the same letter type that letter again You can use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move through lists of options The up and down arrows can also be used to select radio buttons The escape key
297. selected heading into the bib record in place of the invalid heading and returns you to the bib record NOTE If the subject heading selected from the index is of a different index type or a different thesaurus type the following changes may also occur Subject Headings Subject headings may have their indicator 2 changed if the heading selected from the browse index is of a different type from the one being validated Furthermore if indicator 2 that is the second ind changes to a 7 which indicates that the heading type is in subfield 2 the new heading may contain a subfield 2 specifying the heading type Non Subject Headings If anon subject heading is selected from the index upon selecting a valid heading from the list of valid headings and clicking Replace the original tag of the bib heading being replaced may change depending on the new heading For instance if a personal name heading is being validated 100 tag and a corporate heading is selected to replace it the bib tag will change to 110 to reflect the type of the new name heading A record will not be given a new indicator 2 and a new tag simultaneously 5 Right click the mouse in the selection column of the grid in the MARC view form to display a pop up menu with the following selections e Copy this field e Cut this field e Paste before this field e Delete this field e Validate the heading of this field e Move this field up by one moves the focus row up by one row
298. sical location of the digital item You must specify the URL addresses of your URN and DOI handler servers in the URN and DOI fields on the Validation tab of the Session Defaults and Preferences window When you verify the integrity of a URN or DOI link by selecting Verify 856 links from the Record menu see Verifying 856 Links on page 2 22 the URN or DOI identification in the 856 field will be appended to the address of the URN or DOI handler server Furthermore when you follow the verification link to the handler server you will discover whether or not the URN or DOI entered in the 856 field is valid For information about entering URN or DOI links in the 856 field of a MARC record see g DOI and URN Links on page 2 22 For information about Verifying 856 links see Verifying 856 Links on page 2 22 Also for information about what needs to be set up for URN or DOI links to be successful in OPAC and WebVoyage see the Voyager WebVoyage User s Guide 856 link servers DOI See description for 856 link servers URN 856 link servers Image Server The Image Server field designates which viewer to use to bring up an Image Server link You may specify the location of the Voyager Image Server executable the full path must be given such as c symtrix iadms exe or the location of a browser interface program such as http XXX cgi bin scandoc cgi where xxx is the machine on which the program is located scandoc cgi is t
299. site installation and configuration informatin necessary for beginning work in the Cataloging module For information on how the settings in the System Administration module affect the Cataloging module see the Voyager System Administration User s Guide Purpose of this Chapter The purpose of this chapter is to provide prerequisite information needed for using and customizing the Cataloging module Prerequisite Skills and Knowledge To use this document effectively you need knowledge of the following e Basic Microsoft Interface navigation e Basic UNIX commands and navigation e Basic Voyager System Administration Module e Basic WebVoyage configuration Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 1 1 Intermediate knowledge of MARC record formats for creating customized WebVoyage display directories Before You Begin Working with the Voyager Cataloging software is enhanced by the availability of documentation online help and the use of common conventions This section describes the purpose of these resources in order for you to effectively use them Documentation and Online Help The documentation and online help are designed to work together to provide you with the information you need when you need it You can access online help by pressing the F1 function key F1 on your keyboard The user s guides are designed to cover the applications in greate
300. so double click the database in the list of Available Locations to select it You can select as many databases as you want If you select more than one they are searched simultaneously me TIP When a database is selected a check mark displays in the check box located directly to the left of the database name in the list of Available Locations Removing a Database To remove a database from the list of Selected Locations highlight the database and click the Delete gt gt button or Alt D You can also double click the database in the list of Available Locations to remove it To remove all the databases from the list of Selected Locations at once click the Clear button Exiting the Voyager Connection Options Dialog Box Click the Cancel button to exit the dialog box without connecting to a database s or press Alt N Ay IMPORTANT The default database searched during Cataloging s staff side searching is your local database However if you want to search your local database at the same time as another database s you must select Local Database from the list of Available Locations in addition to the other database s to which you want to connect and search If you do not select Local Database only the other database s you select are searched Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Voyager Connection Options
301. st set for By and At textboxes Suppress from OPAC Option To prevent a bibliographic record from displaying in the OPAC module mark the check box labeled Suppress from OPAC or press Alt P This also prevents any information about attached holdings and item records from displaying in the OPAC However if the Suppress from OPAC check box for a location is checked in the System Administration module you cannot uncheck the Suppress from OPAC check box in Cataloging See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for details ie TIP When the Suppress from OPAC box is checked the small book icon in the top left corner of the record is greyed When the check box is unchecked the icon displays in a reddish burgundy shade This gives you a visual indication of the status of that record History Tab Press Alt Y from an open bibliographic record to switch to the History tab The History tab includes a list of every change ever made to a bibliographic record see Figure 2 19 These changes are described in Table 2 4 Table 2 4 History Tab Field Descriptions Field Name Description Date Time The date and the time the change was made Operator The operator who made the change actually the operator name as assigned in System Administra tion Cataloging Location The happening location as defined in System Administration at which the change was made Action The action performed on the record UP
302. stablished name title name title subdivision or subject Voyager s Global Headings Change process is a combination of client interface and batch jobs on the server that process the changes you make to an authority heading When a change is made and saved to the database you can view all of the affected heading changes in the Global Headings Change Queue activity of the Voyager Cataloging module select from the File menu in the Cataloging main menu You must have the proper security profile in System Administration to make these changes When a change to an authority heading or subdivision type initial subfield delimiter or 18x tag of the subdivision is made the Global Headings Change Queue expands to a hierarchical tree displaying all of the changes to the Authority heading as well as the associated authority fields or records You can view the proposed changes see the other information that is affected and finally mark the changes that you want implemented NOTE Traced and untraced reference authority headings may be changed by the Global Headings Change Queue Each of the three branches of the tree see Table 9 3 for a description represents a different aspect of the authority heading information Table 9 3 Tree Descriptions Tree Level Description First level Displays the original authority record prior to changes the 1xx or 18x Second level Displays the modified 1xx or 18x heading the affected headings
303. stems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 6 7 The first field may only contain ASCII graphic characters with code points from 32 through 127 decimal This field may only contain a single character Second Field The second field contains the text to insert into the field of the MARC record This field may contain characters from Latin 1 Any characters from outside the Latin 1 character set must be encoded in XML entity reference format This field may contain an arbitrary amount of text It is possible for this field to contain a lengthy block of text approximately 80 characters Although the default file contains single character entries Third Field The third field contains a description of the entry This field is optional It may contain Latin 1 characters and entity references This field may be 80 characters in length Microsoft Character Map The Microsoft Character Map can be used to cut and paste non Roman characters needed for Cataloging input Use the following path to access the Microsoft Character Map Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt System Tools gt Character Map For more information about the Microsoft Character Map use the Microsoft Help and reference materials on this topic Regional Options for Non Roman Characters Microsoft provides operating system level regional language options that provide another alternative for entering non Roman character Use
304. t Word the following characters are stripped out See Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Character Changes Character ASCII Code tab ASCII 09 carriage return ASCII 0D line feed ASCII 0A subfield delimiter ASCII 1F end of field character ASCII 1E end of record character ASCII 1D Bibliographic Records When you edit the bibliographic level and or type of record in the Bibliographic Leader a dialog box opens warning you about the incompatibility of the 008 to this changed record If you click No or Cancel the changes you made to the Bibliographic Leader will not be saved If you click Yes the changes will be saved and the incompatible portion of the 008 field displays You can then make the changes to the 008 field Deleting a Record You can delete a record from the database by selecting Record gt Delete Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 4 2 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information The procedure for deleting a record is shown in Procedure 4 2 Deleting a Record on page 4 3 Procedure 4 2 Deleting a Record Use the following to delete a record 1 Display the record from the database that you want to delete See Search Dialog Box on page 3 28 for more information 2 Select Record gt Delete 3 Click OK or click Cancel Result This deletes the record or closes the confirmation dialog box without deleting the
305. t Field After F4 Select the Tag cell by clicking in the cell under Tag heading Type the tag or press F2 to select a valid tag from the Cataloging Tips scroll box The tag displays in the cell Select an indicator by clicking in the indicator cell Type the indicator or press F2 to select a valid indicator from the Cataloging Tips scroll box A number representing the indicator displays in the indicator cell Select the Subfield Data cell Press F9 to insert a subfield delimiter in the cell Type the subfield or press F2 to select a valid subfield from the Cataloging Tips scroll box Enter the subfield data If necessary click the ellipse box to expand the data cell The procedure for deleting a tag is shown in Procedure 2 11 Deleting a Tag on page 2 33 Procedure 2 11 Deleting a Tag Use the following to delete a tag Click the row label the grey left column 2 Press the Delete key on the keyboard Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 33 3 Respond to the confirmation message System Tab Pressing Alt S from an open authority record will switch you to the System tab see Figure 2 25 Auth 222 Fearon early childhood library Figure 2 25 Authority Record System Tab The System tab contains the option to approve records for export All the information relating to OK to export is located on the System tab including wheth
306. t headings 1 War and emergency powers United States History LC subject headings AuthRet Note 41 War and literature ILC subiect headinas zl Cancel Search Authority Clear All Copy saa Headings Found Search Staff Subject Headings Search war Figure 3 33 Search results after doing find subject heading search for war The Browse search allow users to scroll through an institution s list of headings For example a browse subject heading search Staff Subject Headings Search for war returns the results shown in Figure 3 34 Browse Headings List E Font Arial x Cbs Staff Subject Headings Search Heading Heading Type AuthRef Mote 19 var LC subject headings 3 War LC subject headings for children Authorized 1 War and civilization LC subject headings a AuthiNote 1 War and education LC subject headings g Reference 0 War and emergency legislation LC subject headings 1 War and emergency legislation Japan History LC subject headings a AuthRef 0 War and emergency powers LC subject headings v Authorized 2 War and emergency powers United States LC subject headings 1 War and emergency powers United States History LC subject headings AuthRet Note 1 War and literature LC subject headings Cancel Search Authority Copy Browse Staff Subject Headings Search war Figure 3 34 Search results after doing a subject heading search for war Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page Fe
307. t page 4 ii February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information Changing Information This section describes the following e How to edit existing records in the Cataloging module e Alternatives for saving a record e Printing options Editing a Record Before you can edit a record you must first open the record For more information see Opening a Record on page 3 8 The procedure for editing a record is shown in Procedure 4 1 Editing a Record on page 4 1 Procedure 4 1 Editing a Record Use the following to edit a record 1 Display the record that you want to edit See Opening a Record on page 3 8 for more information Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 1 2 Edit the record by changing the following e Leader e Fixed fields e Variable fields For more information on these fields see the section about that particular record type in Bibliographic Records on page 2 3 Authority Records on page 2 28 and Holdings Records on page 2 36 To edit a record you can use the same commands as you use for editing a template See Edit Menu on page 10 20 for more information 3 Save the record with one of the following commands Save Save As or Save to Database See Saving a Record on page 4 5 for more information NOTE If you cut and paste information from a different application such as Microsof
308. tabase Copying an Item Record from an Existing Item Record You can copy an item record from an existing item record as long as the item record is in the database like copying MARC records However the barcode and template information are not copied to the record In Session Preferences the Item Defaults tab allows you to complete a template like preference so that when you copy item records information is already entered for your record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 83 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 84 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information Contents Changing Information Editing a Record Deleting a Record Adding a URL to an 856 Field Change Owning Library Saving and Printing Information Saving a Record Save Update Record Alert Save As Save to Database Saving to the Database and to a File Simultaneously Validating a Bib Heading Make a Copy of a Record Printing a Record Printing Labels Bibliographic Records Holdings Records Item Records Spine and Piece Label Print Template Closing a Record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 7 4 10 4 11 4 13 4 13 4 14 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 17 4 30 TM 4 i Contents Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on firs
309. tabase affects validation and separate tag tables are available to save to based on the record format type you choose See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for more information Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 10 14 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Session Defaults and Preferences a General Validation Work Flow ltem Defaults Folders Files Mapping Colors Fonts Expected Character Set of Imported Records Local Import Latin 1 non Unicode 7 Indicator 1 Tag Latin 1 non Unicode MARC21 MARC 8 non Unicode p MARC Mapping OCLC non Unicode RLIN legacy non Unicode Voyager legacy non Unicode Indicator 2 Subfield fa Cancel Figure 10 7 Session Defaults Mapping tab Table 10 6 Mapping tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Expected Character Set of Imported Records Local Import Use the Local Import drop down menu to select the character set of the records being imported locally Your choices include the following Latin 1 non Unicode MARC21 MARC 8 non Unicode MARC21 UTF 8 OCLC non Unicode RLIN legacy non Unicode Voyager legacy non Unicode This provides the information needed by the system to map the incoming records to Unicode UTF 8 encoding Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on f
310. tag number or press F2 to select a valid tag from the Valid Values dialog box Result The tag displays in the cell 5 Click the indicator cell and type the indicator number or press F2 to select a valid indicator from the Valid Values dialog box Result A number representing the indicator displays in the indicator cell Select Bibliographic Template 2x Look in i Template e mm a Auth tem amm History B component773 tem P B Hold tem Desktop My Documents File name Biten o Files of type Template tem T _ Cancel My Network P J Open as read only 4 Figure 2 16 Bibliographic template selection 6 Click the bibliographic data cell labeled Subfield Data and press F9 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 17 Result This inserts a subfield delimiter in the Subfield Data cell NOTE The subfield delimiter may be automatically entered depending on the settings in your Session Defaults and Preferences General tab See Chapter 10 General Tab on page 10 2 7 Type the subfield or press F2 to select a valid subfield Result A valid subfield is entered 8 Enter the subfield data Result The bibliographic data is entered 9 Click Save to DB Result This stores the bibliographic record in the Voyager database NOTE In an 010 field the leading signification spaces are not trimmed To accuratel
311. taloging supplies dummy information in the Leader and the 008 fields This information must then be edited before the record is saved to the database Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records z New Bib Record Figure 3 22 New Bibliographic Record in Cataloging NOTE The Title field in ImageServer is required This information is placed into a new 245 field in the new record during the transfer If the bibliographic template you are using already has a 245 field defined delete one of the 245 fields before saving the record You find duplicate fields in your new record if you have certain fields defined in the template and also specify the same information in the File Documents dialog box Generally you will have a bibliographic template that is for the purpose of creating records with ImageServer links Typically you will want to define a template for the purpose of creating bibliographic records from ImageServer You would then select this template in your Session Defaults prior to adding any record Duplicate fields will only be detected if you have MARC validation on in Session Defaults and Preferences when you save the record If MARC Validation is off be sure to check the record yourself for any duplications or other errors Viewing Information This section discusses the different methods for viewing information thr
312. tatus applies the items are kept in reverse chronological order according to the date they were assigned The Status button is shown in Figure 2 44 Figure 2 44 Status Button NOTE You can only view item statuses when an item record is the active record See the Voyager WebVoyage User s Guide for information about user defined item status terminology in OPAC Table 2 11 contains a complete list of possible statuses Statuses are listed according to rank A status is only viewed in the module if all of the other statuses currently applied to the item are below it in rank Thus a status higher on the list takes precedence over a status lower on the list Table 2 11 Possible Statuses Listed According to Rank Scheduled Assigned automatically when the item has been scheduled by the Media Scheduling module In Process Assigned manually when the item s record is being reviewed or some similar activity is being performed Lost system The status is automatically assigned to overdue items that have not been returned within an interval defined by the library The system will not calculate additional late fees once this status is given Lost library The status is manually assigned to over due items that have not been returned within an interval defined by the library The system will not calculate additional late fees once this status is given Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice o
313. te Import Replace profile from this drop down menu These profiles are defined by your system administrator and specify what actions are taken when duplicate records are found during an import If your profile removes records that are currently in the database and replaces them with the imported record or merges the existing record with a new record the old records are archived on the server in the file replace lt recordtype gt marc If your profile does not replace records that are currently in the database the imported duplicate records are archived on the server in the file discard lt recordtype gt marc Records rejected because they don t match are archived in the file reject lt recordtype gt marc To access the deleted and discarded files on the server or for more information on specific profiles refer to Authority Duplicate Detection Profiles in the Voyager System Administration User s Guide Delete records from work files once saved to database Select this check box to automatically delete a record s from your work files once you save that record to the database Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 3 Table 10 1 General tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Delete records from import file once saved to database Select this check box to automatically delete the record s yo
314. ted using a program such as Notepad which is provided with the Windows operating system NOTE Configuration files can be saved and edited using any word processor However they must be saved in ASCII format ASCII format supports alphabetic numeric and special characters represented by a 7 bit binary number for up to 128 possible characters When you open the Voyager Catalog Tagtable directory you will see the following structure Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 1 Name Marc21 Oele C Alin a Ermarctis ctg n Country ctg an Lang ctg Figure A 1 Files and directories in the Voyager Catalog Tagtable directory The OCLC RLIN and MARC21 folders in the directory contain specific sets of tag tables used solely in the Cataloging module These tag tables are used for MARC validation If you open these directories you see a long list of files as in Figure A 2 The Bmarcfix cfg Country cfg and Lang cfg files are tag tables that are used across modules These files contain data that is used in the Circulation and Acquisitions modules for country and language codes Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page A 2 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode MARC Tag Tables a Amarclxx cfg a Hmarc8xx cfg a Amarc2xx cfg a Hmarcfix cfa a Amarc3xx cfq a Master cfa a Amarc xx cfa a Amarc5xx c
315. ted with the record such as the same title has multiple purchase orders or if one line item was created per copy selecting Record gt View Line Items in Acquisitons or Ctrl M causes a dialog box to display in Acquisitions summarizing all of the line items associated with the bibliographic record see Figure 3 68 This summary is broken down into the Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 73 3 74 following 8 pieces Line Status Title Copies Location s Funds Line Item Type Notes and PO From this dialog box you can view and edit the line item of your choice by highlighting it and clicking the Details button Si TIP To save you time and effort the dialog box summarizing the line items will not close even if you pull up a line item until you press the Close button That way you do not have to go back into Cataloging and repeat the steps for viewing line items in Acquisitions 5 Received Partial Frog and toad are frie2 Juvenile Education 2000 test Single Part 5 Received Partial Frog and toad are frie 2 Juvenile Education 2000 test Single Part Figure 3 68 Dialog box for multiple line item matches in Acquisitions No Line Items If the record you opened does not have any associated line items selecting Record gt View Line Items in Acquisitions or Ctrl M will cause the following error message to display in Cataloging see Figure 3
316. tem record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 23 Display Menu The contents of the Display menu is shown in Table 10 12 Table 10 12 Display Menu Option Description Headings List Displays the list of headings found in the most recent search Title Index Displays the list of titles found in the most recent search Options Menu The contents of the Options menu is shown in Table 10 13 Table 10 13 Options Menu Option Description Session Defaults Displays the options you can set for your ses sion including authority control options Hide Fixed Fields Hides the fixed fields of your records so you can see more of the variable fields Toolbar Toggles the display of the Toolbar on and off Toolbar Text This toggles descriptive text that displays under a particular icon on the Toolbar on and off Toolbar Tips This toggles the tips that display when you hover over a particular icon on the Toolbar on and off Status Bar Toggles the display of the Status Bar on and off Window Menu The contents of the Window menu is shown in Table 10 14 Table 10 14 Window Menu Option Description Cascade Arranges multiple windows so they overlap Tile Arranges multiple windows so they do not over lap Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 10 24 Fe
317. th PZ7 P63123 i Wh 1992 Figure 2 40 Holdings Record Bib Title s Tab Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 53 Typically only one title displays If the holding record is bound with multiple titles display one title for each bibliographic record within the bound holding History Tab Press Alt Y from an open holdings record to switch to the History tab The History tab includes a list of every change ever made to a holdings record see Figure 2 41 These changes are described in Table 2 6 Table 2 6 History Tab Field Descriptions Field Name Description Date Time The date and the time the change was made Operator The operator who made the change actually the operator name as assigned in System Administra tion Cataloging Location The happening location as defined in System Administration at which the change was made Action The action performed on the record UPDATE CRE ATE MERGE REPLACE or RELINK Encoding Level The encoding level as set in the Leader field of the record Suppress Action Whether or not the Suppress from OPAC check box was checked on the System tab Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 54 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Voyager Cataloging sl Ol x File Edit Record Display Options Window Help A2
318. th Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking Voyager Cataloging Bib 60349 Gnema journal 2 File Edit Record Related Records Display Options Win se A G 780Preceding New Open Sav Child Records Titles Save to DB MARC System History Leader 03458cas 2200697 4500 006 005 eon 0815110143 0 oo Tag 11 12 Subfield Data 222 0 fa Cinema journal 245 0 O fa Cinema journal Figure 5 1 Related Records listing applicable profiles for Cinema Journal Figure 5 1 shows a partial display of a MARC record in the Cataloging module Three bibliographic linking profiles are listed for the title Cinema Journal e 776Host e 780Preceding e Child Records Selecting one of the profiles from the list retrieves any related records based on the profile For example if you selected the 780Preceding profile the system looks at the data in the 022 ta of the source record if that is the index defined in the profile and retrieves any records that contain the same data in the 780 x Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5 3 Voyager Cataloging Bib 60350 Journal of the Society of Gnematologists 2 File Edit Record RelatedRecords Display Options Window Help 8oPreceding i i amp 3 I 2 lt 3855ucceeding D New Open Sav Child Records Titles Save to DB Save Plus Na
319. th grid displayed NOTE The Delete button becomes active allowing you to delete what you have applied 6 Click Close Result You exit the 007 linking field dialog box Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 2 11 Bibliographic 008 Fixed Field The 008 is a header in the main record used to describe the main format in the Leader The 008 is required and non repeatable The Bibliographic 008 field displays as a grid which is completely configurable using Voyager s MARC tag tables See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for details on the MARC tag tables The procedure for editing the 008 field on the MARC tab is shown in Procedure 2 4 Editing the 008 Field on page 2 12 Procedure 2 4 Editing the 008 Field Use the following to edit the 008 field on the MARC tab of an open bibliographic record 1 Click the 008 button see Figure 2 11 from the MARC tab of an open bibliographic record gig Figure 2 11 008 Button Result The 008 field displays a grid style dialog box see Figure 2 12 with various drop down menus and text boxes Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 12 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating 008 General Description Book 1972 Fs Single known date probable date SS _ enk England Obsolete Code or Value Not Set Obsolet
320. the database When the nc record is saved to the database the letter a is stored in the 9th position of the leader permanently identifying the record as Unicode formatted along with any remaining inaccuracies and substitiute characters The database conversion process produces a log file for bibliographic holdings and authority records The log files are named as follows log HHHH bib log HHHH mfhd log HHH auth where is the job process ID number Records containing fields that fail to convert to Unicode are still visible in the Cataloging WebVoyage Aquisitions Circulation and Media Scheduling modules subsequent to the conversion process A review of the records with errors is necessary to make corrections not handled by the conversion process The error warning logs provide a variety of useful information to assist with the reivew of records with errors See Table C 1 Table C 2 Table C 3 and Table C 4 for a description of the information that is provided Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode C 5 NOTE There are two levels of error and warning messages record level and field level Table C 1 Record Level Warnings amp Errors Warning Error Description leader 9 is not space This is a warning An attempt is made to convert from Voyager encoding to Unicode This warning may indicate corrupt data or reflect a staff input error
321. the 10 percent that will go under vaccination manually Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 9 13 Heading Merge In order to merge headings you can create a brief or provisional authority record to attach to the old headings and then change the heading and leave the old authority record there until after the Global Change After the Global Change you can delete the dummy authority record Name Title Heading Change Buttons 9 14 If you have a bibliographic record with a name title heading that for example contains both a 1xx and a 240 243 or 245 or it contains a 400 410 411 700 710 711 800 810 or 811 it is only changed if an authority record which contains a nameftitle heading is changed If a non name title authority record with a matching 1xx heading is changed there is no effect on the bibliographic record Behavior of the Dialog Box In order to display the Preview Change Queue you must highlight a new heading in the upper portion of the dialog box Click the Preview button and any bib records affected by the change display in the lower portion of the dialog box If more than 250 bib records are affected by the change the first 250 records display Click the Next button to retrieve the remainder of the bib records If you make any changes such as deleting a record the count only reflects the number displayed compared to the number remaining that
322. the Titles Index dialog box Table 3 4 Titles Index list box Name Type Description Font Drop Select the font used to display text in the Titles Index down dialog box NOTE The Titles Index dialog box displays the Unicode character set Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 33 Table 3 4 Titles Index list box Name Type Description Relevance Column Displays relevance bars for free text searches Title infor Column s Columns contain the title information specified when mation defining searches in the System Administration mod ule for example full title author and format OK Button Displays the Bibliographic record s MARC tab of the selected record s Cancel Button Closes the Titles Index dialog box Search Button Returns to the Search dialog box cleared of previous entries unless the Retain Last Search check box is checked in session preferences Select All Button Opens all of the returned records Clear All Button Clears all highlighted titles The procedure for performing a bibliographic keyword search is shown in Procedure 3 7 Performing a bibliographic keyword search on page 3 34 Procedure 3 7 Performing a bibliographic keyword search 2 3 34 Use the following to conduct a keyword search From the Search dialog box click the Keyword tab Result The Keyw
323. the database the record status is automatically changed to corrected or c When a record retrieved from an existing work file is saved to the database and it has an 001 it is treated as an existing record Cataloging updates the record with a matching 001 in the database When a record does not have an 007 it is treated as a new record When a newly copied newly imported or newly created record is saved to the database Voyager checks for any duplicates in the database and if any are detected the Bibliographic Dedupe Detection dialog box opens Figure 4 4 This lists all of the records that are found to be duplicates according to the rules in the System Administration module For information on duplicate matching see the Bibliographic Duplicate Detection Profile section of the Voyager System Administration User s Guide Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 4 8 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Changing Saving and Printing Information NOTE If any single index in the duplicate detection hierarchy is matched to more than 1000 records all duplicate detection stops Only the first 100 records above the matching threshold are returned to the client ia Bibliographic Dedupe Detection Bee r Record being saved Jeno title found for the new record gt Add as New Record Current Dedupe Profile RLINReplace r Duplicate Bibliographic Records Title 200 Laughing Boy by Oliver La
324. the following path to access the Microsoft Regional Options Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 6 8 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Diacritics and Non Roman Characters Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Regional Options For more information on this topic use the Microsoft Help and reference materials Importing Records with Non Roman Characters Information about considerations for importing Non Roman characters can be found in Bulklmport on page C 8 and also in the Voyager Technical User s Guide Other Diacritic Considerations Other diacritic considerations can be found in Diacritics and MARC21 Compliance Considerations on page C 3 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 6 9 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 6 10 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Pick and Scan Contents Introduction 7 1 Using Pick and Scan 7 2 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 7 i Contents Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 7 ii February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Pick and Scan Introduction Pick and Scan is a feature within Voyager s Cataloging module designed to facilitate mass changes to item records and associated holdings records Pick and Scan allows authorized staff to
325. the key that is underlined on the tab name For example from the 007 dialog box in Figure 2 31 you can use the Alt m keystroke to access the Maps tab without using the mouse See MARC Tag Tables on page A 1 for details on how to define your own keyboard access keys Click the New button at the bottom of the dialog box to add a category A grid displays with various drop down menus Figure 2 31 Select values from the grid by clicking a particular cell and then the down arrow to display drop down menu selections After you make your selections click Apply Notice that a check displays in the check box indicating that values have been selected for that tab such as in Figure 2 31 values have been added and applied on the Map tab You must use either the mouse or the up and down arrows on your keyboard to move from cell to cell within the grid To use the latter first click in a particular cell and then use the up and down arrows to navigate from cell to cell Do not click Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating the down arrow This causes you to browse the selections within a particular drop down menu Note that you cannot use the Tab key to move from cell to cell on the grid This takes you outside the grid altogether To display and browse drop down menu selections click the down arrow or press F4 or the space bar Use the up and down arrows o
326. three characters represented by are numeric and the last character represented by c is alphanumeric map the data from the corresponding tag subfield combination contained within the angle brackets lt gt in the active bibliographic record into the new record replacing the derivation tag If the active source record contains 022 nn a 1234 5678 And the cataloging template contains 773 nn tx lt 022a gt Then the new record contains 773 nn x 1234 5678 Table 5 6 Example 2 Derivation field Rule If the derivation field has the format lt tc c gt no space between and lt map the data from the corresponding tag sub field combination in the active bibliographic record to the new record only if the tag subfield combination exists in the active bibliographic record If the active source record contains 022 nn a 1234 5678 And the cataloging template contains 773 nn lt x 022a gt Then the new record contains 773 nn x 1234 5678 Table 5 7 Example 3 Derivation field Rule If the derivation field has the format lt c gt and the corre sponding tag exists in the active record but the subfields do not match or the corresponding tag does not exist in the active record add only the tag and subfield Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 5
327. to DO Nev lidas Octildgs Neyv items Ost tems Hierarchy Uele Save Search Iicadings Titles Llobal Headinas Lhange amp Preview Uueues 5 x Hearing Mid EE Date inde Tope Process Shakes e Wiliam 1664 1616 Coriodemo 515 2 09 PM Name Tib B 99443 Shakaspaana Wiliam 15644648 Onrincamn AABONN 12979 PM Subject lear Auth 29449 Shakespeare William 15b4 1b1b Loriolanuis Jol x _ Search MAHU System Histow Preview Leader 00431cz 220012In 4500 i fanuansTST20937 0 nine festi ni_acannaabl lalaaa 12 Subtioid Data Lj tan aaiagaan ta DLC te DLC td DLC qa Shakespeare Willam d 1964 1616 p Corbtnuls ja Shakespeare William 4 1504 1046 1 Works of William Shakespeare 1005 4a Hie Worke of Wiliam Shakoepoaro 1886 b comaine Coriotanue and ono othor work System Control Number Figure 9 5 Global Change Preview Authorities Records Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 9 10 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Authority Control b Running the first batch job causes Voyager to add the second level of heading changes to the tree structure These are the changes that are intended to be made The Process flag displays at this level This flag allows you to select which changes you want to have processed by the third batch job c Running the second batch job causes Voyager to add the third level of headings changes t
328. u import from an import file once you save that record to the database Add a subfield a toa new field Select this option to add a subfield a automatically to the field when a new field is added to a record using the Insert field before F3 and Insert field after F4 commands Display MARC Vlews maximized Select this option to open a record in its maximized form automatically NOTE If this option is selected and you have more than one record open at one time you only see the top record The other records open behind the top record You can use the Window gt Cascade command to minimize and view all open records This is important to remember if you select the Close All command from the File menu Validation Tab Figure 10 2 Customize the options on the Validation tab see Figure 10 2 to match your preferences using Table 10 2 for a description of each option Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 10 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Session Defaults and Preferences General Validation Work Flow ltem Defaults Folders Files Mapping Colors Fonts Cataloging formats MME Bypass MARC Validation Bypass MARC21 Character set validation List all the errors C Show errors one at a time J Bypass Authority Control Validation Tl Bypass Decomposition of accented characters for MARC21
329. u have Microsoft Office fonts installed Arial Unicode MS font provides a broad spectrum of characters for the Unicode environment 6 Click the drop down arrow for Font Size to select the font size Result This changes the font size to the one you prefer 7 Check the Font Bold check box to specify that the text displayed in the Variable Fields is bold Result This changes the font weight preference to bold Cataloging Menus Voyager s Cataloging module provides you with the ability to create update and save MARC 21 records NOTE Some of the menus only display after you create or open a record or highlight text in an open record File Menu The contents of the File menu are shown in Table 10 8 Table 10 8 File Menu Option Description Work Record Displays options for opening and deleting exist ing records Template Displays options for creating editing and delet ing templates Login Info Displays your user name and operator ID Save Ctrl S Saves the active record to the location from which it was opened Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 10 19 Table 10 8 File Menu Option Description Save As Ctrl A Saves the active record in a new location such as a work file Close Closes the active record Close All Closes all of the active records Print Setup Displays the Print
330. uary 2004 Voyager with Unicode Templates Introduction A template allows you to use a pre defined MARC record to create new records easily Before you can create a record there must be at least one template in the template directory in the Voyager directory Voyager provides you with three templates e bib tem e auth tem e hold tem These templates should not be deleted e The procedure for creating a new template is shown in Procedure 8 1 Creating a New Template on page 8 2 e The procedure for editing a template is shown in Procedure 8 2 Editing a Template on page 8 2 e The procedure for deleting a template is shown in Procedure 8 3 Deleting a Template on page 8 3 NOTE Templates cannot be retroactively applied to an existing record Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 8 1 Creating Editing and Deleting Templates The procedure for creating a new template is shown in Procedure 8 1 Creating a New Template on page 8 2 NOTE You must have at least one template for each type of record that you want to create such as bib tem auth tem or hold tem Procedure 8 1 Creating a New Template Use the following to create a new template Select File gt Template gt New Select the record type Authority Bibliographic or Holdings and click OK Result The system template for the record type you selected is displayed Cre
331. uary 2004 Voyager with Unicode Session Defaults and Menu Options Session Defaults and Preferences lv Figure 10 4 Session Defaults Work Flow tab Table 10 3 Work Flow tab options for Session Defaults and Preferences Options Description Retain last search Automatic truncation for non keyword searches Select this check box to save the last search performed in the Search dialog box Select this check box to automatically truncate non keyword searches such as Headings searches without requiring the question mark as a truncation character Display bibliographic record directly if search results in only one title Always create a holding when adding holdings to a bib that is do not show existing holdings first Display item record directly if item retrieve results in only one item Select this check box to automatically display a bibliographic record if only one record is available as a result of the search Select this option to be placed in Add mode automatically when a bibliographic record already has holdings and a new one is to be added either by clicking the New Hidgs button on the menu bar or selecting Record gt Create Holdings Select this check box to automatically display an item record directly when only one record is available as a result of your search Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with U
332. uary 2004 Voyager with Unicode 4 15 Bibliographic Records If the active record is a bibliographic record the following is the default information that will display in the Print Labels dialog box See Table 4 2 You can change this information at any time before you print Table 4 2 Default Text in Print Labels Dialog Box Bibliographic Record Field Default Spine Label Spine Label Name as defined for the Location in System Administration Address and Bib ID Piece Label Spine Label Name as defined for the Location in System Administration Address Bib ID Title and Title Brief Holdings Records If the active record is a holdings record the following is the default information that will automatically display See Table 4 3 You can change this information at any time before you print Table 4 3 Default Text in Print Labels Dialog Box Holdings Field Default Spine Label MFHD ID and Call Number Piece Label MFHD ID and Call Number Item Records If you select Print Label and the active record is an item record the following information automatically displays See Table 4 4 You can change this information at any time before you print Table 4 4 Default Text in Print Labels Dialog Box Item Record Field Default Spine Label Spine Label Name as defined for the Location in System Administration Address and Bib ID Piece Label Spine Label Name as defined for the
333. ubfield character can be entered using the following methods e Enter the character from the keyboard e Click Edit gt Insert Subfield F9 e Select Options gt Preferences gt Add a subfield a to a new field Cataloging Templates Templates created in the Cataloging module starting with the Voyager with Unicode release must be created as Unicode templates This implies that the ninth position of the Leader must be set to a See Characteristics of a Unicode Formatted Record in Voyager on page C 2 for more information Analyzing Inconsistencies There are different options for diagnosing inconsistencies in Unicode text Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode C 9 Hexadecimal Value One method for determining the hexadecimal values of non Roman and Roman characters is to copy the text into an editor such as Microsoft WordPad and use Alt Shift x to display the hexidecimal value Resources For more information on a variety of topics related to Unicode browse the following site www unicode org Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page C 10 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Index Index Numerics 006 field 2 6 2 9 007 field bibliographic 2 9 2 11 holdings 2 39 008 field authority 2 31 2 32 bibliographic 2 12 2 14 holdings 2 42 2 44 010 field 2 18 505 field 2 24 856 field 4 3 DOI
334. ugene D Jaffe Stephen Hilbert Guidelines for exercise testing and Book prescription American College of Sports xl Cancel Search Selecta Clear All MARC 273 Records Found Search Keyword test Binet Alfred 1857 1911 Book Book ANONN Jaffe Eugene D Figure 3 26 Titles Index dialog box Sii TIP 3 32 Click the Titles Index button Figure 3 27 or Display gt Title Index to re access the results of the most recent Keyword search when the Titles Index dialog box is closed Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Figure 3 27 Titles Index Button By default the Titles Index dialog box displays the following e Title e Author Date e Relevance column for free text searches Optionally the title author and date columns can be re configured to display other data on the Titles Index dialog box These columns are configured on the Indexes Definitions gt Search Results tab in the System Administration module See the Voyager System Administration User s Guide for more information NOTE If your search retrieves more than 100 titles a Stop button becomes active You can then click the Stop button to cancel the retrieval of more records see Figure 3 28 Figure 3 28 Stop button seen with more than 100 search results Table 3 4 describes
335. ure 3 10 Accessing searches from the History tab on page 3 54 Procedure 3 10 Accessing searches from the History tab Use the following to access a search from the History tab 1 Click the History tab from the Search dialog box Result The list of previous searches displays 2 Click the row of the search you want to access Result The row is highlighted 3 Optional Click the Limits button Result The Search Limits dialog box displays For information about setting limits see Search Limits on page 3 54 4 Optional Click the Edit button Result The correct tab opens on the Search dialog box and you can edit and re execute the search from there 5 Click the Do Search button Result This executes the previous search that you selected Search Limits You can limit your search by Language Location Date Medium Type Place or Status Figure 3 50 shows the Search Limits dialog box Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 54 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Search Limits Location amp Date amp Medium amp Type amp Place amp Status Limit Type J Retain search limits between searches Figure 3 50 Search Limits dialog box Table 3 9 describes the Search Limits dialog box Table 3 9 Search Limits dialog box Name Description List of Limits Types of limits that can be impos
336. ure for configuring the holdings leader is shown in Procedure 2 12 Configuring the Holdings Leader on page 2 38 Procedure 2 12 Configuring the Holdings Leader Use the following to configure the holdings leader 1 Click the Leader button from the MARC tab of an open holdings record The Leader dialog box see Figure 2 28 for holdings information displays as a grid Record Stats STII Corrected or tei nnd x Single part item holdings 3 Holdings level 3 Figure 2 28 Leader dialog box for holdings information 2 Select values from the grid by clicking a particular cell and then the down arrow to display drop down menu selections Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 38 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating You must use either the mouse or the up and down arrows on your keyboard to move from cell to cell within the grid To use the latter first click in a particular cell and then use the up and down arrows to navigate from cell to cell Do not click the down arrow This causes you to browse the selections within a particular drop down menu Note that you cannot use the Tab key to move from cell to cell on the grid This takes you outside the grid altogether To display and browse drop down menu selections click the down arrow or press F4 or the space bar Use the up and down arrows on your keyboard to navigate within the drop down menu From within a drop
337. uses a bibliographic record to display directly if a search results in only one match as opposed to having the Titles Index list box display from which you can select the bibliographic record Keyword Tab and Keyword Searching 3 30 The Keyword tab see Figure 3 25 of the Search dialog box allows you to do keyword searches of all MARC fields and subfields for your search term s Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Keyword Boolean Non Keyword Builder History not using relevance C Free Text using relevance Search for Cancel Clea Limit Go to Google Figure 3 25 Keyword tab of the Search dialog box Table 3 3 describes the fields and selections on the Keyword tab Table 3 3 Keyword tab selections Name Type Description Boolean Radio button Searches using Boolean terms without using relevance When you select Boolean remember to insert Boolean terms Otherwise you will receive a Malformed Query error message Free Text Radio button Searches using relevance without Boolean operators Search for Text box Searches term s or phrases using quotation marks entered here Use a question mark to truncate a search term Add emphasis to specific terms in a free text search by putting one of the following operators before the term e The term must disp
338. ut the bibliographic record has existing holdings In such a case linking an item to the bibliographic record is not allowed because an existing item would already be linked to a holdings record either for this bibliographic record or another one Relink an Item to a Different Holdings If an item record is the active record you can specify a specific holdings record to re link the current item record to NOTE Relinking an item to a different holdings will remove the link between the current item and the original holdings The procedure for relinking an item to a different holdings is shown in Procedure 3 19 Relink an Item to a Different Holdings on page 3 81 Procedure 3 19 Relink an Item to a Different Holdings Use the following to relink an item to a different holdings 1 Select Record gt Relink to a different holding Result The Relink the item to a holding record dialog box opens Figure 3 77 Relink the item to a holding record Enter the holding id Cancel Figure 3 77 Relink the item to a holding record dialog box Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 81 2 Type the appropriate holdings ID in the text box The holdings ID is displayed in the title bar of the item record Click OK to link the item record to the specified holdings record Click Cancel to close the Relink the item to a holding record dialog box without linki
339. values in other stanzas Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode A 15 006Code a amp Books c P amp rinted Music d Manuscr ipt Music e Prin gted Map f Manuscript Map g amp Projected Medium 1 amp Nonmusical Sound j Musical S amp ound k amp 2 D Nonprojectable m Computer amp File o amp Kit p Mi xed Material r amp 3 D Artifact s amp Serial Control t Manuscript amp Lang 006 Books 006 Music 006 Music 006 Maps 006 Maps 006 Visual 006 Music 006 Music 006 Visual 006 Computer 006 Visual 006 Mixed 006 Visual 006 Serials 006 Books Figure A 12 Code type examples from the 006Code stanza of a Bmarcfix cfg file for MARC21 format The specifications in Figure A 12 display as shown in Figure A 13 when the 006 button on the MARC tab of a bibliographic record using MARC21 format in the Cataloging module is selected Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page A 16 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode MARC Tag Tables 006 Additional Material Characteristics a Books Figure A 13 The result in the Cataloging module of the 006Code stanza in the Bmarcfix cfg file Order of Tabs in the Cataloging Module The order that the tabs are displayed in the Cataloging module depends on the order of the lines in the 00xCode stanzas of the Xmarcfix
340. with a default template 5 25 creating with template 5 25 5 27 record type creating template 5 6 Reference Information dialog box 3 43 Related Record source record 5 2 Related Records Cataloging module saving 5 17 Related Records menu Cataloging module 5 1 example 5 3 Relevance column Titles Index 3 34 Remote button 3 29 3 32 3 38 3 50 3 61 Remote Search dialog box 3 62 remote searching 3 29 reproduction of documentation xxxi Resequencing items 3 78 retain last search 3 30 Retain search limits between searches check box 3 58 retaining search limits between searches 3 55 Retrieving authority 3 77 holdings 3 75 3 76 item 3 77 rule for derivation field 5 12 5 16 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Index S Saving records 4 5 to database 4 7 saving Related Records 5 17 scope note 3 44 Search By field 3 37 Search dialog box 3 28 3 49 Keyword tab 3 30 Search For field 3 38 3 50 Search for field 3 31 Search In field 3 50 search limit date 3 54 language 3 54 Limit Type column 3 55 list of limits 3 55 location 3 54 medium 3 54 place 3 54 setting 3 56 status 3 54 type 3 54 Value 3 55 Search Limits dialog box 3 54 3 56 Search Status dialog box 3 64 search type drop down field 3 37 searching accessing search history 3 54 automatic truncation 3 30 by builder 3 49 3 51 by history
341. wn menu Note that you cannot use the Tab key to move from cell to cell on the grid This takes you outside the grid altogether To display and browse drop down menu selections click the down arrow or press F4 or the space bar Use the up and down arrows on your keyboard to navigate within the drop down menu From within a drop down menu you can enter the letter or number that precedes a particular selection For instance if you want to jump from subfield z within the drop down menu to subfield a you can simply press the letter a NOTE In the 008 dialog box the Heading Use selections are made via drop down menus Once you make selections click OK to exit and save your work click Cancel or Esc to exit without saving 2 32 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Variable Fields The Variable Fields grid allows you to add Tags with First and Second Indicators and Subfield Data In order to add or edit information in the Variable Fields grid you must first place your cursor in that grid To do this position and click your mouse in the Variable Fields portion of the record The procedure for adding a tag to the grid is shown in Procedure 2 10 Adding a Tag to the Grid on page 2 33 Procedure 2 10 Adding a Tag to the Grid Use the following to add a tag to the grid Select Edit gt Insert Field Before F3 or Edit gt Inser
342. x 2 Click the plus sign for the limit type you want to select Result This expands the list and displays the list of limit type values see Figure 3 52 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 3 56 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Search Limits Medium Map Computer File Globe Projected Graphic Microform Nonprojected Graphic xl Figure 3 52 Expanded list of limits 3 Select any values from the list you want to use as limits for your search Figure 3 53 shows the Medium limit of Computer File selected NOTE The Add button is not active until a specific limit is selected Search Limits amp Location s amp Date Medium Map Computer File Globe Projected Graphic Ad Delete Clear J Retain search limits between searches Figure 3 53 Computer file selected as search limit 4 Click the Add button or double click the value to add the limit to the list Result The limit type value you selected displays in the Limit Type and Value columns see Figure 3 54 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode 3 57 Search Limits s Language v English Middle 1100 1500 English Old ca 450 1100 Arabic Chinese Danish Value Medium Computer File Year Range 2000 2002 Delete English Clear
343. y have three leading spaces in an 010 field you need four spaces between the subfield marker and the first digit of the LCCN The space immediately after the subfield is added and removed by the Voyager Cataloging client to be consistent in its display of data Deleting Variable Fields Use the Delete key to delete a row of variable information or individual characters within a row Entire Row The procedure for deleting a row of variable field information is shown in Procedure 2 6 Deleting Row of Variable Field Information on page 2 18 Procedure 2 6 Deleting Row of Variable Field Information Use the following to delete an entire row of variable field information 1 Click the cell in the Selection Column see Figure 2 14 next to the row you want to delete Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 2 18 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Record Types and Creating Result This identifies via highlighting the material to be deleted Press the Delete key or click Edit gt Delete Field or right click and select Delete this field Result The system displays a warning dialog box Click Yes or No Result Selecting Yes deletes the highlighted material or selecting No cancels the delete request Click Save to DB Result This updates the record in the database with the deletion Individual Characters The procedure for deleting a row of variable field information is shown in Pr
344. y preferred classification scheme can be identified as the first to process against by Voyager Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page B 4 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Voyager with Unicode Considerations Voyager with Unicode Overview The implementation of Unicode in the Voyager product set is scheduled in phases The first phase of the Unicode implementation includes the following e Cataloging e WebVoyage e Search and MARC Display Functions in the Acquisitions Circulation and Media Scheduling modules The remaining Voyager modules continue to support data in the Latin 1 format Function Enhanced in Cataloging for Font Options and Input of Non Roman Text Operators can search for display and edit the contents of all MARC records using Unicode whether or not the record contains non Roman characters The font in the Cataloging module can be changed to support a variety of languages See Procedure 10 1 Changing Colors and Fonts on page 10 17 for more information Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode C 1 The Voyager with Unicode release supports all the standard Microsoft Windows keyboard and input methods allowing cataloging staff the ability to input non Roman text using any standard keyboard With the flexibility of Voyager with Unicode it is possible to input text that is not part of the MARC21 standard
345. y menu 10 24 DOI 2 22 10 7 Duplicate Barcode 2 57 Duplicate Checking 4 8 E Edit menu 10 20 Editing records 4 1 4 2 templates 8 2 8 3 editing search terms in builder search 3 50 element derivation field bracket left opening angle 5 9 bracket right opening angle 5 10 delimiter symbol 5 9 subfield 5 9 tag 5 9 example for derivation field 5 12 5 16 Exiting 1 5 F field authority 008 2 31 variable 2 33 Bib 5 22 bibliographic 005 2 6 006 2 6 007 2 9 008 2 12 856 2 20 2 21 2 22 880 2 14 variable 2 14 Heading Type 3 42 holdings 007 2 39 008 2 42 variable 2 44 Search By 3 37 Search For 3 38 3 50 Search for 3 31 Search In 3 50 search type drop down 3 37 Template 5 24 field codes 4 22 file initilization voyager ini 3 30 File menu 10 19 Find radio button radio button Find 3 37 find search 3 39 folder Catalog 5 21 5 24 default using to create new record 5 26 defining a default 5 23 5 25 MARCTemplate 5 21 5 24 Tag Tables 5 21 5 24 Template 5 21 5 24 Folders section Folders Files tab Cataloging module 5 23 Template field 5 24 5 26 Folders Files tab 5 18 5 25 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode IN 3 defining a default folder 5 23 5 25 defining a default template 5 19 5 23 Folders section 5 23 Template field 5 24 5 26 Templates section 5 21 bib field
346. y z3 239 50 rg Northwestern Bibliographic 23950 DR University 239 50 ai Purdue University Bibliographic Voyager Purdue 239 50 Biblioaranhic 23950 i Information about Purdue University Purdue University a Connect Cancel Figure 3 57 Selected locations in the Voyager Connection Options dialog box Click the Connect button or click the Cancel button Result If you clicked the Connect button one of the following dialog boxes opens e f you are connecting to one database the Remote Search dialog box opens see Figure 3 58 with the name of the database displayed in the title bar If available from the remote server the same search types are available as those in the regular local search display Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Creating Opening and Viewing Records Remote Search E1SIZ39 50 Keyword Non Keyword Builder History Search by Find f Browse Search for Cancel Clear Limit Remote Figure 3 58 Remote Search dialog box Search by options e If you are connecting to more than one database the Simultaneous Search dialog box opens see Figure 3 59 The types of searches available are limited to those shared by all connected databases Simultaneous Search 4 Keyword Non Keyword Builder History Search by Find Browse Personal
347. yone who uses the Cataloging module on that machine begins with the same defaults that you selected unless they change them For more information about Session Defaults and Preferences for the Cataloging module please see that section of the Voyager Cataloging User s Guide Folders Files Tab Setting defaults on the Folders Files tab is especially useful for MARC derivation of records If you want to use one particular template to create new MARC records you can specify the template as a default in Session Options and Preferences in the Cataloging module You can enter the entire path for a default template in the appropriate box Bibliographic Authority or Holdings The filename must refer to an existing file You can also click the ellipses button to select the template you want from the appropriate directory The procedure for defining a default template is shown in Procedure 5 4 Defining a Default Template on page 5 19 Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 5 18 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Cataloging amp Bibliographic Record Linking Procedure 5 4 Defining a Default Template Use the following to define a default template 1 Open the Cataloging module 2 Select Options gt Preferences from the menu bar Figure 5 8 Voyager Cataloging File Record Display Options Help Preferences ca VY Toolbar v Toolbar Text Toolbar Tips v Status Bar Figure 5
348. ype No Change gt Close Figure 7 1 Pick and Scan dialog box NOTE In order for staff to have access to Pick and Scan one or more of the following minimum security authorizations must be specified e Update Item Records e Delete Item Records e Update Holdings Records Endeavor Information Systems Inc See notice on first page 7 2 February 2004 Voyager with Unicode Pick and Scan Depending on the operator s security level not all Pick and Scan options may be available If for example an operator doesn t have Delete Item Record privileges the Delete Item check box is inactive Pick And Scan Item Options Items Item Status Holding Location No Change ae No Change P Clear All Permanent Location No Change bd NoChange Statistical Categories J Acquisition Tempora Location iy Notherse Cea Branch General Branch Periodicals Circulation Desk Electronic Collections I Delete Item Temporary Type No Change F Media Type No Change X Figure 7 2 Permanent Location options Select the desired change s from the options on the Item Options tab Click the drop down arrow next to the desired option to view available choices Use the check boxes to clear or delete item information For examples see Figure 7 2 and Figure 7 3 Si TIP When making changes to Permanent Location you may also want to simultaneously change the Ho

Voyager with Unicode Cataloging User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents